BMW M5 Owner's Manual

Contents
BMW M
A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
THE BMW M5 SEDAN.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
M5
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW M5.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new
BMW M5. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehi‐
cle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that
will help you make full use of the technical features available in
your BMW M5. The manual also contains information designed
to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contrib‐
ute to maintaining the value of your BMW M5.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the
printed Quick Reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
BMW AG
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/15, 03 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Addendum
ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL
We wanted to provide you with some updates
and clarifications with respect to the printed
BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and
clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.
1. Where the terms “service center,” “the service center,” “your service center,” “service
specialist,” or “service” are used in the
Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that
the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service
center or another service center or repair
shop that employs trained personnel that
can perform maintenance and repair work
on your vehicle in accordance with BMW
specifications.
2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a
“service center” or “your service center,”
we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the
situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW
dealer's service center or another service
center or repair shop that employs trained
personnel that can perform maintenance
and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.
While BMW of North America LLC, at no
cost to you, will pay for repairs required by
the limited warranties provided with respect
to your vehicle and for maintenance under
the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage
periods, you are free to elect, both during
those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other
service centers or repair shops.
3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been
approved by BMW, those references are
intended to reflect that those parts and
accessories are recommended by BMW of
North America LLC. You may elect to use
other parts and accessories, but, if you do,
we recommend that you make sure that any
such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.
4. At page 7, under the warranty section's discussion of homologation, where it states
that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there,” the text should read
that you “may not be able to lodge warranty
claims for your vehicle there.”
5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accessories” section, in the sixth sentence, the
word “cannot” should read “does not.”
6. At page 57, in the “Check and replace
safety belts” section, the text beginning,
“This should only be done by your service
center …” should be disregarded and the
following text should be read in lieu thereof:
“BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important
that this safety feature functions properly.”
7. At page 58, under the heading: “Active
head restraint,” the paragraph beginning,
“Only attach accessories …” should be disregarded and the following text should be
read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends
that you attach accessories approved by
BMW to the seat or head restraint.”
8. At pages 98-99, under the heading: “Special windshield,” the paragraph beginning,
“Therefore, have the special windshield …”
should be disregarded and the following
text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW
recommends that you have the special
windshield replaced by the service center.”
9. At page 172 under the heading: “Objects
within the range of movement of the pedals” and at page 219 under the heading:
“Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph
that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should
be disregarded and the following language
should be read in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that
you use floor mats that have been identified
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Addendum
by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle
and that can be properly fixed in place.”
the following text should be read in lieu
thereof:
10. At page 178, under the heading: “Have
maintenance carried out,” the sentence
beginning, “The maintenance should be
carried out …” should be disregarded and
the following text should be read in lieu
thereof: “BMW recommends that you have
the maintenance carried out by your service
center.”
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of
your vehicle and are determined by the
manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe
and are recommended by the manufacturer
of your vehicle.
11. At page 186, under the heading “Tire inflation specifications,” the sentence beginning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications
apply to approved tire sizes …” should be
disregarded.
15. At page 195, under the heading “Hood,” the
sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar”
should be disregarded.
12. At page 190, under the heading: “Mounting,” the paragraph beginning, “Have
mounting and balancing …” should be disregarded and the following text should be
read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends
that you have mounting and balancing performed by your service center or a tire
mounting specialist.”
13. At page 190, under the heading: “Approved
wheels and tires,” the term “Approved”
should be disregarded and in lieu thereof,
the term “Recommended” should be read
in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly
suggests that you use wheels and tires that
have been recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same
official size ratings, variations can lead to
body contact and with it, the risk of severe
accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate non-recommended wheels and
tires to determine if they are suitable for use
on your vehicle.
14. At page 194, under the heading: “Snow
Chains,” the text should be disregarded and
Information about recommended snow
chains is available from a service center.
16. At page 199, under the heading: “Engine oil
change,” the text should be disregarded
and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:
BMW recommends that you have the oil
changed at your BMW dealer's service center or at another service center that has
trained personnel that can perform the work
in accordance with BMW specifications.
17. At page 201, under the heading: “Service
and Warranty Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models,” the second
paragraph should be disregarded and the
following text read in lieu thereof:
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and
repair performed by your BMW dealer's service center or another service center or
repair shop that employs trained personnel
that can perform maintenance and repair
work on your vehicle in accordance with
BMW specifications. The manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you maintain
records of all maintenance and repair work
performed on your vehicle.
18. At page 204 and page 205, where it reads:
“Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlights,” that text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following
text should be read: “Xenon headlight work
or replacement can cause serious and fatal
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Addendum
injuries.” In the text that follows, where it
reads: “[h]ave any work on the xenon lighting system … ,” the following words should
be read as preceding that passage: “It is
strongly suggested that you …”
19. At page 208, under the “Battery replacement” section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text
should be read:
Use of recommended vehicle batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it
has tested and recommends for use in your
vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions may not
be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you
have the battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that
any “check control” messages of these
comfort functions are no longer displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 224.
6
Notes
At a glance
14
18
26
29
Cockpit
iDrive
Voice activation system
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
182
184
186
195
197
200
201
203
210
216
Refueling
Fuel
Wheels and tires
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Coolant
Maintenance
Replacing components
Breakdown assistance
Care
Reference
Controls
34
53
64
68
83
100
105
127
133
144
151
160
Mobility
Opening and closing
Adjusting
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Lights
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
222 Technical data
224 Everything from A to Z
Driving tips
168
170
174
177
BMW M5 technology
Things to remember when driving
Loading
Saving fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
Symbols
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Orientation
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐
pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the
vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐
arate user's manual, which is also included
with the onboard literature.
Additional sources of
information
The service center will be happy to answer any
other questions you may have.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
6
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐
lected optional features or the country-specific
version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
The respectively applicable country provisions
must be observed when using the respective
features and systems.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Notes
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently from what is shown in
the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Basic information
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐
ries approved by BMW for this purpose.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐
pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the
vehicle.
For your own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated
in a different country it might be necessary to
adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐
ating conditions and permit requirements. If
your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐
gation requirements in a certain country you
cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle
there. Further information can be obtained
from your Service Centre.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐
ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW and related qualified
advice.
BMW has tested these products for safety and
suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.
BMW can assume responsibility for them.
However, we cannot assume any responsibility
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have
not been specifically approved by BMW.
BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply
when country-specific government approval
has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail
to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐
ating conditions to which components might
be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products
could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's
own stringent quality standards.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
7
Notes
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by the service personnel, in‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Notes
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐
nostic tools. You can obtain further information
there if you need it. After an error is corrected,
the information in the fault memory is deleted
or overwritten on a continuous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
Reporting safety defects
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
For US customers
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
9
Notes
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Notes
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1
Seating comfort features
Seat, mirror, steering wheel
memory 59
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 122
Intelligent Safety 112
Active seat 55
Lane departure warning 121
2
Roller sunblinds 49
3
Rear window safety switch 49
4
Power windows 48
5
Exterior mirror operation 60
6
Driver assistance systems
14
Night Vision 118
Head-up Display 97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Cockpit
7
Lights
At a glance
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 133
Parking lights 100
Cruise control rocker switch 134
Low beams 100
11 Instrument cluster 83
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 101
Entertainment source
Daytime running lights 101
Volume
Adaptive Light Control 101
High-beam Assistant 102
Voice activation 26
Instrument lighting 103
8
Telephone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 74
Thumbwheel for selection lists 93
High beams, head‐
light flasher 74
13 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 74
High-beam Assistant 102
Rain sensor 75
Roadside parking lights 101
Clean the windshields and head‐
lights 74
On-board computer 93
14
9
Shift paddles 79
10 Steering wheel buttons, left
Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 69
Auto Start/Stop function 70
M Drive 1 activation 128
15 Horn, total area
M Drive 2 activation 128
Store speed 133
Resume speed 134
16
Steering wheel heating 63
17
Adjust the steering wheel 62
18
Open the trunk lid 40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
15
At a glance
Cockpit
19 Unlocking the hood
All around the center console
1
Control Display 18
2
Glove compartment 160
Top View 141
3
Ventilation 147
Rearview camera 137
4
8
Hazard warning system 210
Central locking system 40
PDC Park Distance Control 135
Side View 140
9
Parking brake 72
5
Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication
10
Drivelogic 79
6
Automatic climate control 144
11
7
Controller with buttons 18
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 129
Engine Dynamics 81
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Cockpit
At a glance
Dynamic Damping Control 131
Servotronic 131
12 Transmission selector lever
All around the roofliner
1
Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 210
4
Reading lights 104
2
Glass sunroof, powered 50
5
Interior lights 103
3
Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐
senger airbag 107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
17
At a glance
iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
Control Display
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Hints
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other traffic, never attempt
to use the controls or enter information unless
traffic and road conditions allow it.◀
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Switch off
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Control elements at a glance
Control elements
Controller
1
Control Display
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
2
Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
iDrive
1. Turn.
At a glance
Press button
Function
BACK
Displays the previous panel.
OPTION
Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press button.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Buttons on controller
Press button
Function
MENU
Open the main menu.
RADIO
Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA
Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV
Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL
Opens the phone menu.
2. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
19
At a glance
iDrive
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
Options menu
▷ Move the controller to the right.
Opens new display on top of previous
screen.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Display of an opened menu
When selecting a menu, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu.
To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
20
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
iDrive
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
At a glance
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
1. "Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
tive map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters
and numbers, it may be necessary to reel
via the controller to the corresponding In‐
put mode, refer to page 24, e.g. when the
spelling of upper and lower case letters is
identical.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function
Controls
Move interactive map or
Internet sites.
Swipe into re‐
spective direc‐
tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on
map or Internet sites.
the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or open Tap once.
a link in the Internet.
Changing settings
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
21
At a glance
iDrive
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
SIM card is blocked.
Status information
Enter PIN.
SIM card is missing.
Entertainment symbols
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
Symbol Meaning
▷ Time.
CD/DVD player.
▷ Current entertainment source.
Music collection.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
22
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port in the front or in the
rear.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
iDrive
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are turned off.
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board comupter.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
On the Control Display:
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
On the Control Display:
1.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Split screen
1.
At a glance
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Saving a function
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
23
At a glance
iDrive
Deleting personal in the
vehicle
Entering letters and numbers
General information
The concept
On the Control Display:
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
leted through iDrive.
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
General information
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
▷ Travel and computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies.
▷ Voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can reel between
entering upper and lower case, letters and
numbers:
Symbol
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Enter the letters.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete personal data"
24
or
Tip controller up.
Without navigation system
Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
ters may be added automatically.
1. Switch on the ignition.
6. "OK"
Enter the numbers.
Select the symbol.
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
5. "Continue"
Function
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
iDrive
At a glance
▷ Target search: names of locations may be
entered in languages available through
Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
25
At a glance
Voice activation system
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The concept
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.
If no other commands are available, use func‐
tion via iDrive.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 96.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select lists such as phone lists via
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
actly as they show in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Voice activation system
Executing functions using short
commands
2.
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
3. ›Tone‹
List of short commands for the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
At a glance
Press button on the steering
wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
One example: open the tone
settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
Adjusting the volume
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
struction until the desired volume is set.
2.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently in use.
3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
Hints on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
27
At a glance
Voice activation system
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 210, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
Select components
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
1.
Press button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
ping the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Scroll forward.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
29
At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
Opening via the iDrive
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
1.
Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
2.
Press selected button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Controls
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
Overview
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Remote control/key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
1
Unlocking
2
Locking
3
Opening the trunk lid
4
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture
Press and hold: Panic mode
Integrated key
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 46.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 35.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 201
Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest.
The storage compartment contains a switch
for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
page 42.
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
Replacing the battery
Controls
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency
detection of the remote control
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐
trol.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take the used battery to a recycling
center or to your service center.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from the
service center.
M double-clutch transmission: if a correspond‐
ing Check Control message appears, hold the
remote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
pressing the brake.
Lost remote controls can be disabled by your
service center.
Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
Control message appears, hold the remote
control, as shown, against the marked area on
the steering column and press the Start/Stop
button within 10 seconds while pressing the
clutch pedal.
Emergency detection of remote
control
If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
change the height position of the remote con‐
trol and repeat the procedure.
Loss of the remote controls
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts.
▷ Empty battery in remote control.
▷ Interference from radio transmissions
through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.
Personal Profile
The concept
Personal Profile provides three profiles, using
which personal vehicle settings can be stored.
Every remote control has one of these profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
35
Controls
Opening and closing
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐
tomatically applied.
Profile management
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Opening profiles
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the personal profile.
3. Select a profile.
Three personal profiles and a guest profile can
be created.
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings is country- and
equipment-dependable.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
tiated anymore between the settings for
the two remote controls.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
1. "Settings"
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
2. "Profiles"
3. "Options"
4. "Rename current profile"
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
Resetting profiles
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
▷ Side View.
1. "Settings"
▷ Head-up Display.
2. "Profiles"
▷ M Drive: configurations.
3. "Options"
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion, steering wheel position.
4. "Reset current profile"
▷ Cruise control.
Exporting profiles
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
▷ Night vision.
36
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function.
Controls
Display profile list during start
The following export options are available:
The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
▷ Via BMW Online.
1. "Settings"
▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.
2. "Profiles"
Popular file systems for USB devices are
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export.
1. "Settings"
3. "Options"
4. "Display user list at startup"
Using the remote control
2. "Profiles"
Note
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Take the remote control with you
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online.
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface.
Unlocking
Importing profiles
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
Press button on the remote control.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being unlocked.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐
vated. This function is not available, if the
interior lamps were switched off manually.
▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
closing are folded open.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
For Settings, refer to page 46.
Anti-theft protection is switched off.
The alarm system, refer to page 47, is dis‐
armed.
1. "Settings"
Convenient opening
2. "Profiles"
3. "Guest"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
37
Controls
Opening and closing
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Opening the trunk lid
Locking
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether the
vehicle was previously locked or unlocked.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐
not be unlocked from inside without special
knowledge.◀
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
being locked.
Anti-theft protection is switched on. It pre‐
vents the doors from being unlocked using the
lock buttons or the door openers.
The alarm system, refer to page 47, is armed.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior
lamps were switched off manually.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the antitheft warning system, refer to page 48, are
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To reel off the alarm: press any button.
38
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 46.
If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is
locked again as soon as it closes.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Switching on the headlight courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 39.
Controls
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and
the key.◀
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Without remote control
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the
door lock. In this case, the other doors must be
unlocked or locked from the inside.
Alarm system
With some country versions, the alarm system
is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the
integrated key.
In some country-specific versions, the alarm
system is triggered when the vehicle is un‐
locked via the door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 35.
From the outside
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐
not be unlocked from inside without special
knowledge.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
39
Controls
Opening and closing
From the inside
Doors
Unlocking and locking
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Danger of jamming
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Pressing the central locking system button
locks or unlocks the vehicle with the front
doors closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Trunk lid
Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening from the outside
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press button on the trunk lid.
▷
▷ Press the central locking system button to
unlock the doors together, and then pull
the door handle above the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Unlocking with the remote control,
refer to page 38.
The trunk lid opens.
Opening from the inside
With the vehicle is stationary, press
the button in the driver's footwell.
The trunk lid opens.
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
Locking and closing
Hints
Controls
Automatic tailgate operation
Opening
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Locking
▷ Press button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
▷
Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Opening with the remote control,
refer to page 38.
▷
Push the button in the driver's
footwell.
Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid
to lock the vehicle prior to closing.
Pressing the button again stops the motion.
The driver's door must be closed for this pur‐
pose.
▷ When starting the engine.
The opening procedure is likewise interrupted:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
Closing
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
Provide edge protection
Sharp objects or those with edges can
hit the rear window while driving and damage
the heat conductors of the rear window. Pro‐
vide edge protection.◀
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk
lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
Closing
Without Comfort Access:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
41
Controls
Opening and closing
▷ Press button on the inside of the trunk lid.
The trunk lid closes automatically.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
▷ Press button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
The closing operation is interrupted:
With Comfort Access:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
trunk lid.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the trunk lid.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical fault, manually op‐
erate the unlocked trunk lid slowly and
smoothly.
To close it completely, push the trunk lid down
lightly. It is closed automatically.
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Locking separately
The trunk lid can be locked separately using
the switch in the center armrest. If the center
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
arm rest is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the central locking system.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using valet service. The infrared remote con‐
trol can be handed out without the key.
Emergency unlocking
Controls
▷ Open the trunk lid individually.
▷ Open/close trunk lid with no-touch activa‐
tion.
▷ Start the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely,
arrow.
Comfort Access
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control.
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
43
Controls
Opening and closing
Locking
Separately unlocking the trunk lid
Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing
mote control button.
the re‐
The situation of the doors does not change.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle
door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 sec‐
ond without grasping the door handle.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control.
Opening and closing trunk lid with notouch activation
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐
cle.
The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch ac‐
tivation using the remote control you are carry‐
ing. With automatic tailgate operation, it can
also be closed with no-touch activation. Two
sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion
in the center of the area at the rear of the car
and the trunk lid opens and/or closes.
Convenient closing
Monitor closing
Monitor closing to ensure that no one
becomes trapped.◀
Foot movement to be carried out
Do not touch vehicle
With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;
otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from
hot exhaust system parts.◀
1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.
2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle
door, arrow, with your finger and hold it there
without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing and holding
the remote control button.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
leg must pass through the ranges of both
sensors.
Controls
Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐
ing operation.
Avoiding unintentional closing
In situations in which the opened trunk
lid should not to be closed with no-touch acti‐
vation, ensure that the remote control is lo‐
cated beyond the range of the sensor, at least
5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car.
Otherwise, the trunk lid may be closed inadver‐
tently, for example by an unintentional or mis‐
interpreted movement of the foot.◀
Opening
Keep the closing path clear
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Preventing inadvertent opening
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
In situations where the trunk lid is not to
be opened with no-touch activation, ensure
that the remote control is located beyond the
range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m from
the rear of the car.
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐
vertently, for example by an unintentional or
misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
Closing
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
Tailgate closing with no-touch activation is
only possible with automatic tailgate operation.
Malfunction
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
The hazard warning system flashes on and an
acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid
closes.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
When closing, the trunk lid pivots back and
down.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
The closing of the trunk lid has no effect on the
locking of the vehicle.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
45
Controls
Opening and closing
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 39.
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Adjusting
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.
Automatic locking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.
Doors
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
3.
Select the symbol.
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Trunk lid
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel position adjusted last will be stored for
the active profile.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3.
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened.
Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Tailgate"
The trunk lid is opened.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
The trunk lid is opened and the doors
are unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or
objects damaged when the seat is moved
back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position reel is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.
1. "Settings"
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
Controls
Activating the setting
Panic mode
1. "Settings"
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Alarm system
The concept
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control, Comfort Access or at
the door lock the alarm system is disarmed or
armed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the
alarm on some country-specific versions.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again when the doors are locked.
The hazard warning system flashes once.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
When the still open access is closed, inte‐
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will
be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
47
Controls
Opening and closing
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
Power windows
Hint
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
not operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Opening
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
▷
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Press the button to the resistance
point.
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stopse the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 37, via remote control.
Closing
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,
injuries may result.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
Controls
Safety switch
General information
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 43.
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, e.g., from opening
and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.
Pinch protection system
Switching on and off
Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the win‐
dow's range of movement; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,
injuries may result.◀
E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐
vent window from closing properly - proceed
as follows:
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transport‐
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐
vision.◀
Roller sunblinds
General information
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind for the rear window after having activated
it a number of times in a row, the system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot
be moved at low interior temperatures.
Driver's door controls
1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and
hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain margin.
2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again
within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
49
Controls
Opening and closing
Roller sunblind for rear window
Press button.
Roller sunblinds for the rear side
windows
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
it onto the bracket.
Do not open the window while the roller
sunblind is tilted
Do not open the window while the roller sun‐
blind is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of dam‐
age at high speeds that may result in personal
injury.◀
Glass sunroof, powered
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately, using the
same switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐
erwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐
selves.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
tilted and the sliding visor
opens slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor separately
▷ Press the reel in the desired
direction to the resistance
point and hold it there.
The sliding visor opens, as
long as the reel is held
down. If the sliding visor is
already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens.
The glass sunroof closes as
long as the reel is held
down. If the glass sunroof is
already closed or in the tilted
position, the sliding visor
closes.
▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past
the resistance point.
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the
sliding visor is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Opening and closing
Controls
tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐
tomatically.
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
Pressing the reel upward stops the motion.
E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as
follows:
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold.
Briefly press the reel twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
reel upward stops the motion.
2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 37, via remote control.
▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐
cess, refer to page 43.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
pletely opened, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the reel.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the reel for‐
ward past the resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
Pinch protection system
Initializing the system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check
that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear;
otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐
rupted in certain extreme situations, such as
when thin objects are present.◀
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor closing and make sure that the
closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐
erwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the reel up and hold it until
the initialization is complete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the glass sun‐
roof and sliding visor are
completely closed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
51
Controls
Opening and closing
▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Adjusting
Controls
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Keep the movement area unobstructed
When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people might get injured or objects
damaged.◀
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 56.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 57.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 105.
Seats
Hints
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
1
Thigh support
2
Forward/back, height, tilt
3
Shoulder support
4
Backrest width
5
Lumbar support
6
Backrest, head restraint
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐
cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐
sition is automatically retrieved if the Function,
refer to page 46, is activated for this purpose.
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear
while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under
the safety belt in the event of an accident. This
would eliminate the protection normally pro‐
vided by the belt.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
53
Controls
Adjusting
Adjustments in detail
5. Thigh support.
1. Forward/back.
2. Height.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
3. Seat tilt.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
4. Backrest tilt.
54
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Adjusting
Shoulder support
Controls
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last.
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
Switch off
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
Press button longer.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
The LEDs go out.
Active seat
Temperature distribution
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.
The heating action in the seat cushion and
backrest can be distributed in different ways.
On the Control Display:
1. "Climate"
2. "Front seat heating"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Rear seat heating
Press button. The LED lights up.
Front seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
55
Controls
Adjusting
If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Active seat ventilation, front
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
belt out of the holder when applying it.
The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐
cle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.
Hints
Switching on
Press button once for each ventilation
level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs
are lit.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐
jure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable
objects, or be pinched.◀
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Adjusting
What reduces the restraining effect
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull
the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the
tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;
otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the
restraining effect is reduced.◀
Controls
Safety mode
In critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap‐
plication, the front safety belts tighten auto‐
matically.
If the situation passes without an accident oc‐
curring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
Buckling the belt
Damage to safety belts
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
aged otherwise:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Tensioning the safety belt
automatically
When the belt is closed, it is automatically
tightened once after the release.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐
nism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Check and replace safety belts
This should only be done by your service
center; otherwise, this safety feature might not
work properly.◀
Front head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Adjust the head restraints of all occupied
seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
57
Controls
Adjusting
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
Distance to the back of the head:
manual head restraints
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint
covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the per‐
sonal safety of the occupants will be endan‐
gered.◀
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
aged otherwise:
Have the active headrest checked and if
needed replaced.
Adjusting the height
Adjusting electrically.
▷ Forward: by pulling.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Distance to the back of the head:
electrical head restraints
The head restraint is automatically reposi‐
tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Adjusting
Adjusting the head restraint
Adjust the head restraints of all occupied
seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Controls
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjusting the height
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
The concept
Folding forward
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and
called up. Settings for the backrest width and
lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Hints
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head re‐
straint forward.
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐
dent.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
59
Controls
Adjusting
Keep the movement area unobstructed
When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people might get injured or objects
damaged.◀
At a glance
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐
tion.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
Front
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Storing
Exterior mirrors
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
General information
3.
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
If the SET button is pressed accidentally:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently in
use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.
Note
Estimating distances correctly
Calling up settings
Comfort function
1. Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
of an accident.◀
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting
the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Adjusting
At a glance
Controls
Activating
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Fold in and out
1
Adjusting 61
2
Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3
Fold in and out 61
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
E. g. this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 59.
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.
Automatic Curb Monitor
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
Before washing the car in an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
be damaged, depending on the width of the
vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 62.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
61
Controls
Adjusting
Interior rearview mirror, manually
dimmable
Steering wheel
Note
Turn knob
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Manual steering wheel adjustment
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
1. Fold the lever down.
The concept
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Power steering wheel adjustment
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 59.
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Adjusting
Controls
Steering wheel heating
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 min,
steering wheel heating is automatically acti‐
vated again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
63
Controls
Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The right place for children
Note
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Deactivating the front-seat passenger
airbags
If a child restraint system is used in the front
passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐
senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐
bags are activated, even with a child restraint
system.◀
Installing child restraint
systems
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear in child restraint systems provided in
accordance with the age, weight and size of
the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk
of injury in an accident.
Hints
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.◀
To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐
tems, observe the information provided by the
system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐
tive effect can be lost.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 107.
64
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint systems
Ensuring the stability of the child seat
When installing child restraint systems,
make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐
tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and
headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐
justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that
all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise
the stability of the child seat can be affected,
and there is an increased risk of injury because
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Transporting children safely
of unexpected movement of the seat back‐
rest.◀
Controls
Child seat security
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Deactivating the front-seat passenger
airbags
If a child restraint system is used in the front
passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐
senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐
bags are activated, even with a child restraint
system.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 107.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it up to medium height to obtain
the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐
nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
LATCH child restraint system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Note
Follow manufacturer's information for
LATCH child restraint systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
systems, observe the operating and safety in‐
formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
65
Controls
Transporting children safely
erwise, the level of protection may be re‐
duced.◀
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Mounting points
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper Top Tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Note
Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
system is resting snugly against the backrest;
otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐
duced.◀
Note
Mounting eyelets
Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐
per retaining strap to secure child restraint
systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could
be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair (2) of LATCH sym‐
bols. Use of inner lower anchors from
standard outboard LATCH positions to
install a child restraint system in the center is
not recommended. For the center position,
use the vehicle seat belt instead.
Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the
strap will not properly secure the child restraint
system in the event of an accident.◀
Before installing LATCH child
restraint systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
systems
1
Direction of travel
2
Head restraint
1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to
the user's manual of the system.
3
Hook for upper retaining strap
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
4
Mounting point/eye
5
Rear window shelf
6
Seat backrest
7
Upper retaining strap
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Transporting children safely
Controls
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint. Do not change
the middle head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
Guide it over the head restraint of the mid‐
dle seat.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 49.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
67
Controls
Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
M Double-clutch transmission:
The engine starts if the brakes
are stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop
button.
Manual transmission: The engine starts with
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop
button is pressed.
Ignition on
M double-clutch transmission: Press the Start/
Stop button without stepping on the brake.
Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
68
Ignition off
M double-clutch transmission: Press the Start/
Stop button again without stepping on the
brake.
Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
P when the ignition is switched off
P is engaged automatically when the ig‐
nition is switched off. When in an automatic car
wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not
switched off accidentally.◀
The ignition automatically cuts off while the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available
when the low beams are turned off.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are turned off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Radio ready state
Activate radio-ready state:
▷ When the engine is running: press the
Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving
The radio-ready state switches off automati‐
cally:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g.,
the ignition is automatically switched off for the
following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,
the daytime running lights are activated.
Controls
Repeated starting in quick succession
Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐
edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned,
posing a risk of overheating and damage to the
catalytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at
moderate engine speeds.
M double-clutch transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
Starting the engine
Hints
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of
danger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and engage trans‐
mission position P; otherwise, the vehicle may
begin to move.◀
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Engine stop
Hints
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
not start the engine.◀
Apply parking brake and further secure
the vehicle if needed.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
69
Controls
Driving
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb.◀
is available when the vehicle is traveling faster
than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic
car wash, refer to page 216.
M double-clutch transmission
Switching off the engine
1. Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to
a stop.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
M double-clutch transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
3. Set the parking brake.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.
Semi-automatic mode
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state, refer to page 72.
When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it
70
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is
ready for an Automatic engine
start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
Controls
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Double-clutch transmission: Change from
selector lever position D to N, R or D/S.
▷ M double-clutch transmission: Accelerat‐
ing while simultaneously applying the
brake.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ M double-clutch transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a
number of times in succession.
Preventing an automatic engine stop
with aM double-clutch transmission
The concept
To make it possible to drive off very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic en‐
gine stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
forcefully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal
braking force.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
71
Controls
Driving
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Overview
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
P is engaged automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons
as if the driver were absent.
72
Parking brake
Setting
Apply parking brake and further secure
the vehicle if needed.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
not release the parking brake.◀
Pull the reel.
The LED lights up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
While driving
Use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the reel and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the reel is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lights light
up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down down to a speed
of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is
set.
Controls
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Automatic release in cars with manual
transmission
Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen‐
gages when the clutch pedal is released.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically released:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Gear engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
▷ Engine power is sufficient to drive off.
Inadvertent operation of the clutch pedal
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Manual transmission: Press the switch
while the brake or clutch pedal is
pressed.
M double-clutch transmission: Press the
switch while pressing on the brake pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
M double-clutch transmission
Inadvertent operation of the accelerator
pedal
Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐
erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is
set in motion and there is a risk of an acci‐
dent.◀
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator:
Make sure that the clutch pedal is not
operated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehi‐
cle is set in motion when the clutch is released,
and there is a risk of an accident.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1. Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press the reel while stepping on the
brake pedal or transmission position P is
set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
▷ Engine on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
73
Controls
Driving
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
High beams, headlight flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
Washer/wiper system
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Hints
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐
shield
Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen
to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades
and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀
Do not activate wipers on dry windshield
On the Control Display:
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.◀
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Switching on
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Push wiper lever up.
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Controls
Activating/deactivating
▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
Switch off and brief wipe
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
Push wiper lever down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐
intentional wiping can cause damages.◀
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Turn the thumbwheel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
75
Controls
Driving
Clean the windshield, headlights
Folding wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are activated.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze
onto the windshield which might impede your
viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; operation might damage pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Fold wipers back when you want to change the
blades or with pending low temperatures.
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
Washer fluid
Hints
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
injury if it is used incorrectly.
Therefore, keep it away from possible sources
of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container
and inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to
personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving
Washer fluid reservoir
Controls
▷ Various drive programs, Drivelogic.
▷ Upshifting display, Shift point indicator, re‐
fer to page 99.
▷ Automatic downshifting and protection
from misshifting even in sequential mode.
▷ Launch Control.
▷ Low Speed Assistant.
Selector lever, selector lever positions
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
At a glance
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the
right mixture.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
ferent manufacturers because they can clog
the windshield washer nozzles.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
M double-clutch
transmission with Drivelogic
General information
The M double-clutch transmission with Drive‐
logic is an automatic shift transmission with
two clutches and partial transmissions in which
the gears can be changed without interrupting
the tractive force.
The operation is via the selector lever or two
shift paddles on the steering wheel.
Functions
▷ Drive mode or Sequential mode.
▷ R: reverse gear.
▷ N: neutral.
▷
Center position, forward position.
▷ +: manual upshifting.
▷ -: manual downshifting.
▷ D/S: reel between drive mode and sequen‐
tial mode.
Engaging a selector lever position
Press on the brake pedal and pull or push the
selector lever in the corresponding direction.
As soon as the selector lever is released, it re‐
verts to the center position. In position R, the
selector lever locks.
The engaged selector lever position is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster and on the se‐
lector lever.
If a selector lever position is engaged, the vehi‐
cle may start rolling, after the brake is released,
e.g. on downhill slopes. Thus, drive off immedi‐
ately after releasing the brake.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
77
Controls
Driving
Use the Slow Speed Assistant for maneuver‐
ing and during stop-and-go traffic.
Low Speed Assistant
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking
speed.
This can also be used for rocking the vehicle in
the snow. To do this, reel between reverse
gear and forward gear without stepping on the
brakes in the process.
Activating
1. Engage a driving position.
2. Briefly tap the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle rolls at minimum speed.
This is possible in 1st and 2nd gear and in re‐
verse gear.
Overheating
Do not ride the brake; otherwise, the
transmission may overheat.◀
Switch to Sequential mode: shift using the
shift paddles or the selector lever, or push the
selector lever in the D/S direction.
S Sequential mode
Use the shift paddles or the selector lever to
upshift or downshift without letting off the gas.
▷ Shortly before falling below a gear-de‐
pendent minimum speed, the transmission
is automatically downshifted.
▷ Upshifting or downshifting is done only if
the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate.
For example, there is no downshifting if the
engine speed is too high.
▷ Kickdown: the lowest possible gear is se‐
lected by simultaneously operating the
kickdown and the left shift paddle or selec‐
tor lever.
▷ It is also possible to start out in 2nd gear,
e. g. on icy roads.
Switch to Drive mode: push selector lever in
D/S direction.
Deactivating
R is Reverse
Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to a
stop.
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Flashing display on the selector lever
of the double clutch transmission
The actually engaged transmission position
can deviate from the selector lever position in
some situations. The display in the selector
lever flashes.
Observe the display in the instrument cluster,
refer to page 79, in these cases.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, e.g. The vehicle
can then roll, refer to page 216.
P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
D Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati‐
cally changed.
Kickdown: for maximum acceleration, e. g.
when passing. To do this, depress the acceler‐
ator pedal past the resistance point.
78
It is also possible to rock the vehicle up to
6 mph/10 km/h. To do this, reel between for‐
ward gear and reverse gear without stepping
on the brakes in the process.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 68, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 68, and when position R
or D is set.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is set.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake is released
while the vehicle is stationary and position
D or R is set.
Controls
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
Displays in the instrument cluster
Drive mode
▷ Engaged gear together with
a D, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, refer to
page 79, arrow 2.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Drivelogic
Various driving programs are available.
Sequential mode
▷ Engaged gear, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, refer to
page 79, arrow 2.
▷ Gear shift indicator, refer to
page 91
After each switch between Sequential mode
and Drive mode, the last program selected is
an active.
Exception: after each engine start, driving pro‐
gram 1 is active in Drive mode.
In Drive mode
Choice of three driving programs:
Note
When the external temperature is very low, the
display may not work. Current driving direction
is recognizable at the engaged selector lever
position.
▷ 1: efficient driving.
▷ 2: relaxed driving.
▷ 3: sporty driving.
In Sequential mode
Gear change
Choice of three driving programs:
Shifting in Sequential mode possible.
▷ 1: comfortable shifting operations.
A shift in Drive mode causes a reel to Sequen‐
tial mode.
▷ 2: sporty, fast shifting operations.
Using the selector lever
▷ 3: maximum shifting speed, Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 80.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
79
Controls
Driving
Selecting driving program using
button in center console
Risk of an accident
Use the settings for DSC in M Drive; oth‐
erwise, driving stability may be impaired, and
there is risk of an accident.◀
Display in the instrument cluster
Selected driving program corre‐
sponds to the number of illumi‐
nated fields.
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired driving program is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Launch Control
Selecting driving program using
M Drive
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
On the Control Display:
Hints
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3.
The concept
Select the symbol.
4. "Mode"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
▷ "D": drive mode
▷ "S": sequential mode.
6. "Shift position"
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
8. Selecting another driving program.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
Component wear
Do not use Launch Control too often;
otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 170, period.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Activate Launch Control
1. Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control, refer
to page 130.
▷
2. Select Sequential mode with gear 1 and
driving program 3.
▷
3. With the engine running, apply the brake
with the left foot.
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving
4. While the vehicle is stationary, press the
selector lever forward and hold it.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The starting engine speed adjusts.
Controls
M Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The M Driving Dynamics Control affects the
response of the vehicle to accelerator pedal
movements.
6. If necessary, change the starting engine
speed by 500 rpm via cruise control.
Programs
7. Release brake. When the selector lever is
released, the vehicle accelerates. Continue
to depress the accelerator pedal.
▷ "Efficient": efficient, comfortable. Minimal
fuel consumption.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
Response behavior options:
Ideal e. g. in city traffic or on snow.
▷ "Sport": sporty, dynamic.
Launch Control is available again only after a
certain distance has been driven.
▷ "Sport Plus": spontaneous, direct. Maxi‐
mum dynamics.
System limits
Selecting a channel
This transmission has an overheating protec‐
tion mechanism, which protects the clutch
from extreme stress.
Via M Drive
▷ Indicator lamp lights up yellow:
transmission too hot.
Avoid high engine stress and fre‐
quent starts.
▷ Indicator lamp lights up red: transmission
is overheating.
Further driving at a moderate pace is pos‐
sible. At the next opportunity, stop the car,
shut off the engine and allow the transmis‐
sion to cool down.
Avoid fast starts, and on inclines did not accel‐
erate lightly while letting the clutch slip; other‐
wise, the transmission may overheat.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3.
Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired channel.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
▷
During traffic jams or at very low speeds, use
the Low Speed Assistant, refer to page 78.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
81
Controls
Driving
Using the button
Press button repeatedly until the desired
program is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Display in the instrument cluster
Engine Dynamics Control with selected
program with activated Display of the
system states of the driving dynamics,
refer to page 90.
Manual transmission
Shifting
Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐
vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead
to engine damage.◀
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the selector
lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐
verse gear.
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Controls
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview, instrument cluster
1
Fuel gauge 87
5
Engine oil temperature 87
2
Speedometer
6
Current fuel consumption
3
Messages, e.g. Check Control
7
Electronic displays 83
4
Tachometer 87
8
Reset miles 88
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 93.
▷ Date, refer to page 88.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 88.
▷ Digital tachometer, refer to page 88.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 70.
▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 89.
▷ On-board computer, refer to page 93.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
83
Controls
Displays
▷ Gear display with Drivelogic, refer to
page 89.
Red lights
▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 88.
Safety belt reminder
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to
page 84.
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on
the driver or passenger side is not
buckled. The safety belt reminder can
also be activated if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat.
▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to
page 89.
▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
▷ Range, refer to page 89.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 90.
▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 92.
▷ System states of driving dynamics, refer to
page 90.
▷ Time, refer to page 88.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
defective.
Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐
ice center immediately.
Parking brake
Check Control
The parking brake is set.
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
84
For additional information, refer to Release
parking brake, refer to page 73.
Brake system
Continue to drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐
ice center immediately.
Front-end collision warning
Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the
vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
speed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Pedestrian warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal
sounds.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐
ing force boost in some cases defec‐
tive. Stop carefully. Take into account
longer brake travel. Have this checked
by the service center immediately.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving
profile to the driving circumstances.
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system
checked by the service center.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 129.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched off.
For additional information, refer to Dy‐
namic Stability Control DSC, refer to
page 129.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
Controls
M Dynamic Mode MDM is switched on.
For more information, see M Dynamic
Mode, refer to page 129.
Additional flashing: MDM controls the
drive and brake forces. The vehicle is
stabilized.
Illuminated: MDM failed. Have the sys‐
tem checked by the service center.
For more information, see M Dynamic
Mode, refer to page 129.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 111.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform
the reset of the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
85
Controls
Displays
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 108.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
Steering system
Steering system in some cases defec‐
tive.
Have the steering system checked by
the service center.
uation.
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 102.
Cruise control
Engine functions
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐
ice center.
For additional information, refer to Onboard Diagnostics socket, refer to page 202.
Blue lights
High beams
Lane departure warning
High beams are activated.
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 121.
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 74.
General lamps
Check Control
Green lights
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored. The symbol is
shown in the display of the instrument
Turn signal
Turn signal on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
refer to page 74.
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
For additional information, refer to
Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
fer to page 100.
86
cluster.
M Drive
M Drive 1 is activated.
M Drive 2 is activated.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lights.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
"Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
Symbols
▷
Controls
"Service request"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Contact your service center.
▷
"Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 182.
Tachometer
Press the onboard computer button on the
turn signal lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
Always avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field. In this
range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
87
Controls
Displays
middle or in the left half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk
of an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 200.
Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 96.
Odometer and trip odometer
Date
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
The date is displayed in the
computer.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 96.
Show/reset kilometers
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
Digital tachometer
Display
The current speed is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
Activate display
External temperature
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Digital speedometer"
Adjusting the unit
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Dig. speedo:"
4. Select the desired unit.
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Controls
With navigation system: range with
destination guidance active
If respective equipment is fitted
and destination guidance is ac‐
tive, the remaining range is dis‐
played when the destination is
reached.
Gear display with Drivelogic
Sequential mode
▷ Engaged gear, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, refer to page 79,
arrow 2.
Current fuel consumption
Display
Drive mode
▷ Engaged gear together with
a D, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, refer to page 79,
arrow 2.
Range
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the current fuel
consumption can be displayed
in the instrument cluster. Check
whether you are currently driv‐
ing in an efficient and environmentally-friendly
manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the on-board co‐
mupter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking
curves aggressively - engine operation
might vary.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail
and damage might occur.◀
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. If necessary, "M dynamic driving syst."
The display for the current fuel con‐
sumption is active.
Display of the dynamic driving sys‐
tems, refer to page 90.
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
Display
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
89
Controls
Displays
Displaying energy recovery
1. "Settings"
Dynamic driving systems
Display
2. "Instrument cluster"
The dynamic driving system
states are displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
3. If necessary, "M dynamic driving syst."
The display for the energy recovery is
active.
Display of the dynamic driving sys‐
tems, refer to page 90.
Symbols Description
EfficientDynamics display
M Engine Dynamics Control, refer
to page 81.
Displaying Efficient Dynamics
Dynamic Damping Control, refer to
page 131.
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.
Servotronic, refer to page 131.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
Activate display
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
1. "Settings"
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. If necessary, "M dynamic driving syst."
The display for the dynamic driving
systems is active.
Display for current consumption, refer
to page 89, and energy recovery, refer to
page 89.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Service requirements
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The concept
The current efficiency can be displayed.
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
"EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
90
Your service specialist can read the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Display
3.
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your service center before
a service due date.
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
"Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your service center before
a service due date.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
"Service required"
You can check when your service center was
notified.
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
Controls
Description
Gear shift indicator
No service is currently required.
The concept
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The gear shift indicator is active in the sequen‐
tial mode of the M double clutch transmission
and for the manual transmission.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Entering appointment dates
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
91
Controls
Displays
Displays
Symbol
At a glance
Camera
Description
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection
The concept
The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
Speed limit detection
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
detected speed limit. The camera in the area of
the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs
at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐
head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐
bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐
tected and compared with the vehicle's
onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and
will be displayed depending on the situation.
The system takes into account the information
stored in the navigation system and also dis‐
plays speed limits present on routes without
signs.
Hints
Personal judgment
Switching on/off
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
ment cluster via the computer.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed limit detection
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
Current speed limit.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
Speed limit detection is not
available.
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
Controls
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Display
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.
On-board computer
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐
strument cluster and the Head-up Display:
Indication in the info display
The information from the com‐
puter is shown in the info display
in the instrument cluster.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
93
Controls
Displays
Calling up information on the info
display
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
Press the onboard computer button on the
turn signal lever.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Information is displayed in the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Average fuel consumption
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
the info display:
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
on-board comupter.
▷ Range.
Average speed
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
Resetting average values
▷ Speed limit detection.
Press and hold the onboard computer button
on the turn signal lever.
Not for a multi-functional instrument dis‐
play.
Distance to destination
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Adjusting the info display
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
you can select what information from the com‐
puter is to be displayed on the info display of
the instrument cluster.
94
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Speed limit detection
Sport displays
Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 92, function.
The concept
Trip computer
The vehicle features two types of board com‐
puters.
Controls
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
Displaying sport displays on the
Control Display
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
2. "Sport displays"
Resetting the trip computer
1. "Vehicle info"
On the Control Display:
Speed warning
1. "Vehicle info"
The concept
2. "Trip computer"
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause
a warning to be issued.
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
1. "Settings"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
2. "Speed"
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the controller.
Speed warning is stored.
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
95
Controls
Displays
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
3. "Format:"
On the Control Display:
The time format is stored.
1. "Settings"
4. Select the desired format.
Automatic time setting
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
speed warning.
Settings on the Control
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Auto time set"
Date
Time
Setting the date
Setting the time zone
2. "Time/Date"
1. "Settings"
3. "Date:"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
4. Select the desired time zone.
5. Press the controller.
The time zone is stored.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
Setting the time
The date is stored.
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
Setting the date format
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
1. "Settings"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
5. Press the controller.
4. Select the desired format.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
The date format is stored.
7. Press the controller.
Language
The time is stored.
Setting the language
Setting the time format
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Setting the voice dialog
Controls
Head-up Display
The concept
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
1. "Settings"
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
2. "Control display"
▷ Wet roads.
3. "Brightness"
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
5. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Switching on/off
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
97
Controls
Displays
Display
Setting the brightness
Standard view
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
▷ Speed.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
▷ Navigation system.
On the Control Display:
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
M view
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Adjusting the height
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
1
Current engine speed, highlighted
2
Shift point indicator
3
Pre-warning field, speed display
4
Red warning field, speed display
5
Speed
Setting the rotation
6
Gear display/warning messages
On the Control Display:
4. Turn the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Activate M view:
1. "Settings"
Select displays in the Head-up Display.
2. "Head-Up Display"
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
4. Turn the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Special windshield
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
98
3. "Rotation"
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Displays
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
placed by a service center only.
Shift point indicator
Controls
When the maximum speed is exceeded, the
supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect
the engine. Speeds in this range must be
avoided.
General information
The display is in the Head-up Display.
Shift point indicator in the Head-up
Display
Switching on
Shift lights are only shown in the Head-up Dis‐
play in the M view, refer to page 98.
1. Switch on Head-up Display, refer to
page 97.
2. "Settings"
3. "Head-Up Display"
4. "Displayed information"
5. "M View"
Display
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
tachometer.
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated
fields indicate the upcoming upshift mo‐
ment.
▷ Arrow 2: fields are illuminated in red. Do
not wait any further to shift.
When the maximum possible speed is
reached, the entire display flashes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
99
Controls
Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Position of switch
: the vehicle's lights
light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Overview
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to
page 101.
Parking lights
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
Low beams
with the ignition
Position of switch
switched on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lights
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position
or
: the parking and interior
lights light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
1
Rear fog lights
2
Depending on the equipment: automatic
headlight control, Adaptive Light Control,
High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights,
Daytime running lights
On the Control Display:
3
Lights off, daytime running lights
1. "Settings"
4
Parking lights, daytime running lights
2. "Lighting"
5
Depending on the equipment: low beams,
welcome lights, High-beam Assistant
3. "Welcome lights"
6
Instrument lighting
Activating/deactivating
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
Parking lights/low beams,
headlight control
General information
Position of switch:
100
,
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the radio-ready state is switched off if the
lights are turned off and the headlight flasher is
switched on.
,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Lights
Controls
Setting the duration
2. "Lighting"
On the Control Display:
3. "Daytime running lamps"
1. "Settings"
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
Roadside parking lights
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Automatic headlight control
Position of switch
: the low beams are acti‐
vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in
twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlight control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
ment in determining when to turn the lights on
in response to ambient lighting conditions.
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switch off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.◀
Adaptive Light Control
Daytime running lights
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position
,
or
. After the ignition is switched off, the park‐
ing lights light up in position
.
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
The concept
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
101
Controls
Lights
Activating
Position of switch
switched on.
Note
with the ignition
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
Personal responsibility
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐
ment of when to use the high beams. There‐
fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐
tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀
Activating
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for
acceleration and braking operations in order
not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position
or
.
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
High-beam Assistant
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
The concept
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
When the low beams are activated, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off or suppresses the light in the areas that
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a camera on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are activated whenever the traffic
situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams non and
off as usual.
102
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams. Depend‐
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
the blue indicator light will stay on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Lights
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
Controls
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
Interior lights
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
General information
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐
ton on the turn signal lever.
The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights
and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐
cally.
System limits
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Overview
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
1
Interior lights
2
Reading lamp
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To reel off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
103
Controls
Lights
Reading lights
Setting the brightness
Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lights.
Bang & Olufsen High End Surround
Sound System
The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Adjusting speaker lighting
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
The lighting can be individually set.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "B&O"
4. Select the desired lighting setting.
▷ "Off": no lighting.
▷ "Reduced": the speakers in the field of
view are faded while driving.
▷ "On": the speakers are always illumi‐
nated.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, the lighting can
be individually adjusted in the interior for some
lights.
Selecting color scheme
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select desired setting.
With a color scheme selected and welcome
lights activated they illuminate in the line's
color when vehicle is unlocked.
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
Controls
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Airbags
1
Front airbag, driver
4
Side airbag
2
Front airbag, front passenger
5
Knee airbags
3
Head airbag
Front airbags
Side airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
105
Controls
Safety
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the risk of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible when the airbag is
triggered.
▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
devices or' mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
might occur when front airbag is activated.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
might occur when airbag is activated.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the roofliner.◀
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐
ploying the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, you may risk burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
the service center or an authorized repair shop
for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
unintentional activation of the airbag - both
may lead to injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐
ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐
erational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐
tem checked immediately.
In case of a malfunction have airbag system
checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk
that the system does not function as expected
in case of a severe accident.◀
Controls
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically recommended
by your vehicle's manufacturer.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
Automatic deactivation of the frontseat passenger airbags
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
proper functioning of the front passenger air‐
bag might not be assured.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
Detected child seats
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
107
Controls
Safety
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
Hints
Tire damage due to external factors
With a respective message appearing on Con‐
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
the accuracy of this function over the longterm.
Sudden tire damage caused by external
circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.◀
Calibrating the front seats
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 186.
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1. Press the reel and move the respective
seat all the way forward.
2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury
or damage to objects.◀
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The status is displayed.
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.
Status information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Carry out reset
Controls
5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Do so by
checking the tire inflation pressure using
the Mobility System. To correct the tire in‐
flation pressure
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
3. Repair flat tire with the Mobility System or
replace the damaged wheel.
On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
Required tire inflation pressure check
message
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
A Check Control message is displayed in the
following situations
▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
but no reset was done.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
109
Controls
Safety
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
the level of the last confirmation.
In this case:
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire
change.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are
correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
110
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Controls
detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Perform reset"
The concept
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
When initializing the once set inflation tire
pressures serve as reference values in order to
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Do so by
checking the tire inflation pressure using
the Mobility System. If the tire inflation
pressure in all tires is correct, the Flat Tire
Monitor may not have been initialized. In
this case, initialize the system.
3. Repair flat tire with the Mobility System or
replace the damaged wheel.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
111
Controls
Safety
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀
Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 113.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 115.
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
Hints
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style
The displays and warnings of the system
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
112
The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
Switching on/off
Controls
Detection range
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure.
Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
Hints
The concept
The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally the collision warning is delayed
avoiding false alarm.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style
The displays and warnings of the system
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀
Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
113
Controls
Safety
At a glance
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
Button in the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently in use.
Warning with braking function
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Brake and increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Switch off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.
114
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous prewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and M Dynamic mode MDM is not activated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
Controls
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
version, the field of view of the camera in
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
scured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of false warnings.
Pedestrian warning
System limits
The system's detection potential is limited.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
function warns of an imminent collision with
pedestrians during daytime or nighttime.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
The function is subdivided into the following
systems:
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ During daytime: Pedestrian warning with
city braking function, refer to page 115
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ At night: Night vision, refer to page 118
Detection range
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function
The concept
The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐
destrians.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
115
Controls
Safety
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
General information
In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐
sions with pedestrians at speeds from about
6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h
shortly before a collision the system supports
you with a braking intervention.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Hints
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style
The displays and warnings of the system
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀
Detection range
Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas.
At a glance
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
Button in the vehicle
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Intelligent Safety button
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
Camera
Controls
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and M Dynamic mode MDM is not activated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switch off
Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
System limits
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
Braking intervention
▷ In tight curves.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
117
Controls
Safety
▷ If the camera viewing field or the front
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Night Vision with Pedestrian
and Animal Detection
radiation emitted by the object. Objects that
are similar in temperature to the environment
or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐
tect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐
ent light, the image is only displayed when the
low beams are activated.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian and animal detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of
the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects
pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm
objects that are similar in shape to human be‐
ings or animals are detected by the system. If
necessary, the heat image can be displayed on
the Control Display.
Warm objects that are similar in shape to hu‐
man beings are detected by the system.
Heat image
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.
Object detection and warning only functions in
darkness.
With heat image activated on the Control Dis‐
play:
People detected by the system are displayed
with a slight yellow hue.
Animals detected by the system are displayed
in a darker yellow.
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and
cold objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object
and the background and on the level of heat
118
Under good ambient conditions, the object de‐
tection operates within the following distance
ranges:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐
prox. 230 ft/70 m
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
Controls
Environmental influences can limit the availa‐
bility of object detection.
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detec‐
tion is temporarily switched off.
The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐
gether with the headlights.
Switching on/off
Hints
Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
personal judgment of the visibility conditions
and the traffic situation. The view ahead and
the actual visibility conditions must always be
the basis on which the vehicle speed is ad‐
justed; otherwise, there is a risk to road
safety.◀
Switching on automatically
When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐
ically active after every driving-off.
Switch off
The system is only switched off until the next
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
button.
Press button.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
The LED goes out.
Switching on heat image additionally
The heat image from the Night Vision camera
can also be displayed on the Control Display.
This function has no effect on object detec‐
tion.
Press button.
Intelligent Safety button
The image from the camera is displayed on the
Control Display.
Adjustments via the iDrive
Switch on/switch off heat image
With heat image switched on:
1. Press the controller.
Camera
2. Select brightness or contrast.
▷
Select the symbol.
▷
Select the symbol.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
119
Controls
Safety
Display
The displayed symbol can vary with the people
detected.
Warning of people or animals in
danger
Intervene actively by braking or make an eva‐
sive maneuver.
If a collision with a person or an animal de‐
tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐
bol appears on the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled
out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
When animals are detected, an animal
symbol is displayed. The symbol also
shows the side of the road on which
the animal was detected. Intervene actively by
braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Acute warning
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
When animals are detected, an red animal
symbol is displayed with the signal tone.
Red symbol in the instrument cluster.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
The warning area for the pedestrian warning
consists of two parts:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
Display in the Head-up Display
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
The warning is displayed simultane‐
ously in the Head-up Display and on
the instrument cluster. The displayed
symbol can vary with the people detected.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made
between the central or expanded area.
When animals are detected, an animal symbol
is displayed.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed
increases, the area becomes longer and wider,
e.g.
Prewarning
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area
immediately in front of the vehicle.
The yellow symbol is displayed when a person
in the extended area is moving from the right
or left towards the central area.
120
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such
as the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
Limits of pedestrian and animal
detection
In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐
trians are detected as animals or animals as
pedestrians.
Small animals are not detected by the object
detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐
ble in the image.
Limited detection:
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are
covered.
Controls
Hints
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the
course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
cle.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
No display on the rear screen
The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐
played on the rear screen.
Lane departure warning
Lane departure warning
Camera
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
121
Controls
Safety
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper
monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes
and the steering wheel vibrates.
Hints
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
Controls
At a glance
Display
Button in the vehicle
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing
Active Blind Spot Detection
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the
blind spot or approaching from behind.
Radar sensors
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing
flashes brightly.
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
123
Controls
Safety
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
▷ PreCrash
▷ PostCrash
FCC ID:
Attentiveness assistant
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
The concept
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this
situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.
Note
Personal responsibility
The system cannot act as a substitute for
the personal assessment of one's physical
state and may not detect an increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐
rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is
rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐
tected too late and an accident be caused as a
result.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue can be detected.
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights light up in addition.
Active Protection
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
General information
The Active Protection safety package consists
of systems that are independent of each other:
▷ Attentiveness assistant.
124
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Safety
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
Controls
Note
Personal responsibility
The system cannot possibly serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
the traffic situation. The system may not al‐
ways detect critical situations reliably and in a
timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation
and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may
result.◀
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
Function
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts
are automatically pretensioned once after the
vehicle is driven is away.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
In critical driving situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
PreCrash
The concept
With this system critical driving situations that
might result in an accident can be detected
above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In
these situations, preventive measures are au‐
tomatically taken to minimize the risk of an ac‐
cident as much as possible.
Critical driving situations may include:
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
If the vehicle includes the front-end collision
warning or front-end collision warning with
braking feature, impending collisions with vehi‐
cles driving ahead or stopped in front of you
can also be detected within the system's
range.
▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats:
automatic positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All
other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
PostCrash
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
tervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐
hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐
terrupts automatic braking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
125
Controls
Safety
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving stability control systems
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Drive-off assistant
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to
roll back.◀
M Drive
The concept
Individual settings can be carried out in two
preassigned configurations for the vehicle.
When the engine is started, an efficient driving
state is active by default. M Drive is deacti‐
vated.
At a glance
Configurations
The configurations are preassigned as follows:
▷ "M Drive 1": relaxed, comfortable driving.
▷ "M Drive 2": sporty, dynamic driving.
Setting options
Symbol Meaning
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC, re‐
fer to page 129, and M Dynamic
Mode MDM.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
Programs of M Engine Dynamics
Control, refer to page 81.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
127
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Deactivating
Symbol Meaning
Programs of Dynamic Damping
Control, refer to page 131.
Programs of Servotronic, refer to
page 131.
Press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel.
Indicator lights
▷ Indicator lamp comes on: corre‐
sponding M Drive is activated.
Drivelogic, refer to page 79: shift
modes and Drivelogic driving pro‐
grams.
▷ Indicator lamp flashes: M Drive
could not be activated. Antilock
braking system ABS or Dynamic
Stability Control DSC directly regu‐
late the driving stability.
Views of the Head-up Display, refer
to page 97.
Reactivate M Drive if indicator lamp
is no longer flashing.
Configuring M Drive
The preassigned configurations can be individ‐
ually adjusted.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the desired setting option.
4. Select the desired channel.
Individual settings are stored for the profile
currently in use.
Hints
If M Drive is activated, individual settings can
also be modified outside of M Drive, e. g. using
the buttons in the center console. This deacti‐
vates M Drive.
To reactivate all settings made for M Drive on
the Control Display, briefly press one of the fol‐
lowing buttons:
▷
If M Drive is activated, a change in the setting
on the Control Display is immediately adopted.
▷
Activating/deactivating M Drive
To adopt the changed settings in M Drive,
press and hold the corresponding button.
Activating
Press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
Activate M Drive 1.
▷
Activate M Drive 2.
Resetting M Drive
Individual settings can be reset to default val‐
ues.
1. "Settings"
If DSC OFF or MDM is set in M Drive, a mes‐
sage appears in the instrument cluster. This
message is confirmed by pressing the button
again.
128
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. "Reset M Drive 1" or "Reset M Drive 2"
4. "Yes"
To cancel resetting: "No"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving stability control systems
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Controls
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The concept
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
DSC prevents traction loss in the power
wheels when driving off and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
cle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
Note
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
even with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Do not deactivate DSC when driving with
roof load
Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control
DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roofmounted luggage rack.
Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐
ing-critical situation due to the elevated center
of gravity.◀
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
M Dynamic Mode makes it possible to drive on
a dry roadway with high longitudinal and trans‐
verse acceleration but with limited driving sta‐
bility.
Only in the absolute limit area does the system
intervene for stabilization by reducing the en‐
gine power and by braking interventions on the
wheels. In this driving condition, additional
steering corrections may be necessary.
Limited stabilizing interventions
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, sta‐
bilizing interventions are carried out only to a
reduced extent. You must react yourself; oth‐
erwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Activating MDM
Press button briefly.
Overview
The MDM and DSC OFF indicator lights
on the instrument cluster light up.
Button in the vehicle
Deactivating MDM
Press button.
The MDM and DSC OFF indicator lights
go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
129
Controls
Driving stability control systems
Via M Drive
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
On the Control Display:
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
Select the symbol.
3.
4. "MDM"
To open M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not longer
than approx. 10 seconds, until the indica‐
tor lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and displays DSC OFF.
▷
The DSC system is switched off.
A message appears in the instrument cluster.
This message is confirmed by pressing the
button again.
Activating DSC
Press button.
Deactivating MDM
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Press the appropriate button 1 or button 2 on
the steering wheel again.
Via M Drive
M Dynamic Mode and the settings selected
under M Drive are deactivated.
On the Control Display:
Indicator/warning lights
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
1. "Settings"
Indicator lights light up:
3.
Select the symbol.
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
4. "DSC OFF"
To open M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
DSC indicator lamp also flashes:
▷
M Dynamic Mode controls the drive
forces and brake forces.
▷
Indicator lights light up:
M Dynamic Mode or DSC has failed.
A message appears in the instrument cluster.
This message is confirmed by pressing the
button again.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving stability control systems
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
Active M differential
Controls
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
The concept
The active M differential assures continuously
variable locking of the rear axle differential de‐
pending on the driving situation. This prevents
individual rear wheels from spinning even
when DSC is switched off and in M Dynamic
Mode, so that optimum traction is always as‐
sured in all driving situations.
▷
Using the button
The driver is responsible adapting his or her
driving behavior to the situation.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort fitting road surface and driving style.
Programs
Setting options for calibrating the shock ab‐
sorbers:
Press button repeatedly until the desired
program is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Display in the instrument cluster
Dynamic Damping Control with se‐
lected program with activated display
of the system states of the driving dy‐
namics, refer to page 90.
▷ "Comfort": comfort-oriented.
▷ "Sport": balanced out.
▷ "Sport Plus": consistently sporty.
Selecting a channel
Via M Drive
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3.
Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired channel.
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
reduced.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
131
Controls
Driving stability control systems
sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
veyed.
Programs
Steering force setting options:
Display in the instrument cluster
Servotronic with selected program with
activated display of the System states
of the driving dynamics, refer to
page 90.
▷ "Comfort": low.
▷ "Sport": medium.
▷ "Sport Plus": high.
Selecting a channel
Via M Drive
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3.
Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired channel.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
▷
Using the button
Press button repeatedly until the desired
program is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving comfort
Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
Controls
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview
Press but‐
ton
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt,
refer to page 133
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 134
Resume speed, refer to
page 134
Cruise control
rocker switch:
The concept
The system maintains a preset speed via the
buttons on the steering wheel. The system
brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking
is insufficient.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Hints
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
stant speed, e.g.:
Maintain, store, change speed,
refer to page 134
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's
series, optional features and country specifica‐
tions.
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
The cruise control can be used.
Switch off
Deactivated or interrupted system
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
cle and cause an accident.◀
With deactivated or interrupted system
use your brakes, steering and moves as usual
to avoid the chance of an accident.◀
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
133
Controls
Driving comfort
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
This is displayed, refer to page 134, in the
speedometer and briefly in the instrument
cluster.
Interrupting
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned
on if needed.
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ MDM is activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed
Hints
Adjusting the desired speed
Modify desired speed to road conditions
and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,
there is the risk of an accident.◀
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Or:
Resuming the desired speed
Press button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
134
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving comfort
Controls
ment cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on.
An acoustic warning is first given:
Desired speed
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
tem requirements are currently not ready for
operations.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Hints
Personal responsibility
Even an active system does not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility while
driving.
Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
independently react to all traffic situations.
Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe
the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
react when needed - risk of accident.◀
Avoid driving fast with PDC
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
ble - then the object is reported through:
Avoid approaching an object too fast.
Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐
tive.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
135
Controls
Driving comfort
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are located both in
front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
continuous signal is sounded.
PDC Park Distance Control
An interval tone is interrupted with the appro‐
priate equipment after about 3 seconds:
Switching on/off
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
Switching on automatically
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
Volume
The rearview camera also switches on.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press button.
The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐
justed similar to the sound and volume set‐
tings of the radio.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the reel can be made to PDC:
Display
System limits
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
136
"Rear view camera"
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving comfort
Controls
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐
sors.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
Surround View
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
The concept
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 137
▷ Side View, refer to page 140.
▷ Top View, refer to page 141.
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
Rearview camera
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
The concept
▷ On rough road surfaces.
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic car washes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
137
Controls
Driving comfort
Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects
that are not lidtured by the camera.◀
At a glance
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
Button in the vehicle
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated:
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
Rearview camera
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Camera
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating assistance functions
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tail gate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 219.
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving comfort
Controls
Pathway lines
Obstacle marking
▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the
image of the rearview camera.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
▷ They help you to estimate how much
space is needed when parking and maneu‐
vering on level pavement.
Their colored margins match the markings of
the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐
tance to the object shown.
▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐
ing angle and are continuously adjusted to
the steering wheel movements.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
Turning circle lines
▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐
posed on the rearview camera image to‐
gether with pathway lines.
▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐
sible turning radius on a level road.
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐
tain angle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
139
Controls
Driving comfort
Display settings
Hints
Brightness
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 135.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.
Side View
Cameras
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐
ture the image.
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 219.
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving comfort
Controls
Switching on/off
System limits
Switching on/off manually
The cameras lidture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Press button.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Top View
The concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the doors and
the road area around the vehicle are shown on
the Control Display for this purpose.
General information
The image is lidtured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
rearview camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show
the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects
that are not lidtured by the camera.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Top View
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
141
Controls
Driving comfort
Cameras
Display
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in
the PDC display.
The lenses of the Top View camera are located
at the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐
age quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 219.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The rearview camera image is displayed. To
switch to the Top View:
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, it is possible to reel to top view:
"Rear view camera"
"Rear view camera"
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
142
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
Displaying the turning radius and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
the space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving comfort
Controls
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The lane line depends on the engaged
gear and the current steering angle. The
track line is continuously adjusted for the
steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
143
Controls
Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Automatic climate control
1
Air distribution, left
11 Air distribution, right
2
Temperature, left
12 Seat heating, right 55
3
AUTO program, left
13 Active seat ventilation, right 56
4
Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat
5
Remove ice and condensation
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
6
Maximum cooling
15 Cooling function
7
Display
16 Rear window defroster
8
Air flow, AUTO intensity, right
17 SYNC program
9
AUTO program, right
18 Active seat ventilation, left 56
10 Temperature, right
144
19 Seat heating, left 55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Climate control
Hints
Controls
AUTO program
Sufficient ventilation
Press button.
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
dow condensation increases.◀
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Climate control functions in detail
The cooling function, refer to page 146, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Manual air distribution
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the
condensation sensor.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating li‐
dacity, and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
145
Controls
Climate control
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
button on the driver's side to utilize the con‐
densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow
to the windshield.
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
dow condensation increases.◀
Cooling function
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, optimum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
ting, warmed again.
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running is indicated.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 173, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
SYNC program
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
The current settings on the driver's
side for temperature, air flow, air distri‐
bution, and AUTO program are transferred to
the front passenger side and to the left and
right rear.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
146
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side or in the rear are
changed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Climate control
Residual heat
Switching on
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat
the interior.
Press any button except:
Functional requirement
▷ Up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ If necessary, SYNC program.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
The availability of the function is shown on the
display of the automatic climate control.
Switching on
1. Switch off the ignition.
2.
Controls
Press the right side of the button
on the driver's side.
The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐
mate Control Display.
The interior temperature, air volume and air
distribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance, refer to page 201, of
your vehicle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
Switch off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of
the button on the driver's side.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Switching the system on/off
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature in
the upper body region, arrow 1.
Switch off
▷ Complete system:
Press and hold the left button on
the driver's side until the control
clicks off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on
the front passenger side.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
The set interior temperature for the driver
and passenger are not changed.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
147
Controls
Climate control
Ventilation levels
Ventilation, side
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level
current is fanned out.
: the air
▷ Maximum air flow:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level
: the air
is partially fanned out and partially bundled.
This maximizes the air supply.
▷ Direct ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level
: the air
is bundled and can be directed to a specific
point.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 2.
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Rear automatic climate
control
At a glance
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1.
1
Temperature
2
AUTO program
3
Vent settings
Toward blue: colder.
4
Air flow, AUTO intensity
Toward red: warmer.
5
Display
6
Maximum cooling
7
Seat heating 55
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 3.
Switching the rear automatic climate
control on/off
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Climate control
Controls
3. "Rear climate"
Manual air distribution
The rear automatic climate control is not op‐
erational if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
defogging the windows is active.
The air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐
ual needs.
AUTO program
▷ Upper body region.
Press button.
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically:
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the upper body and into the foot‐
well.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed:
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
▷ Footwell.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Switching the system on/off
Switch off
Press and hold the left button.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Switching on
Temperature
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Press any button except:
▷ Seat heating.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
149
Controls
Climate control
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Functional requirements
Parked-car ventilation
▷ Using the preset reel-on time or when op‐
erated directly: any external temperature.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time af‐
ter being switched off.
Preselecting the reel-on time
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the reel-on time
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐
vated.
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Interior equipment
Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
Compatibility
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the instructions of the system
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
ally compatible with the universal garage door
opener.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior
rearview mirror
The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the universal garage door
opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐
mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐
trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐
jury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
151
Controls
Interior equipment
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior rearview mirror. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐
gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior rearview mirror and the
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
6. To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternatingcode wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code system.
rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing
and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
peat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
tem also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
To synchronize:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this step up to three times in order
to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
zation is complete, the programmed func‐
tion will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Interior equipment
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that
the button on the interior rearview mirror
has been programmed. The system can
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Controls
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Manual transmission: Front
Opening
Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the uni‐
versal garage door opener, ensure that there
are no people, animals, or objects within the
range of movement of the remote-controlled
system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or
damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀
Press on the cover.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the system
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
153
Controls
Interior equipment
Danger of burns
Push in the lighter.
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
M double-clutch transmission: Front
Opening
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Rear
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Press on the cover.
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Interior equipment
Lighter
Controls
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
Note
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Danger of burns
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Front center console: manual
transmission
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.
Take the remote control with you when leaving
the vehicle so that children cannot use the
lighter and burn themselves.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Press on the cover.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Connecting electrical
devices
Front center console: M double-clutch
transmission
Hints
Do not connect charging devices to the
12 volt socket in the vehicle
Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐
tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as
this may damage the vehicle battery due to an
increased power consumption.◀
Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Press on the cover.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
155
Controls
Interior equipment
USB interface for data
transfer
Center armrest
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35.
▷ Music collection, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Remove the cover.
Hints
Rear center console
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
With navigation system Professional
or TV: at a glance
In the front passenger footwell
Socket is located below the glove compart‐
ment.
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Through-loading system
In the cargo area
The concept
The socket is located in the cover of the load‐
ing lip.
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Interior equipment
Controls
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
and are in an upright position. Otherwise, the
head restraint and screen could be damaged.◀
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.
1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety
belt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐
other safety belt.
Hints
Danger of jamming
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in or reaches into the area of
movement of the rear seat backrests when the
middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐
jury or damage may result.◀
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
rear window shelf.
Ensuring the stability of the child seat
When installing child restraint systems,
make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐
tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and
headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐
justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that
all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise
the stability of the child seat can be affected,
and there is an increased risk of injury because
of unexpected movement of the seat back‐
rest.◀
3. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go.
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest.
Opening
Move the front seats to an upright posi‐
tion
Before folding down the rear backrests, ensure
that the front seats are moved forward slightly
5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves
forward slightly.
6. Fold backrest forward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
157
Controls
Interior equipment
Closing
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the
sharp edges of the skis.
5. Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle.
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐
gaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly
when folding back, otherwise transported
cargo could enter the car's interior during
braking or evasive maneuvers and endan‐
ger the vehicle's occupants.◀
2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on
the rear window shelf.
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.
6. Tighten the retaining strap.
To secure cargo, refer to page 175, with nets
or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
lashing eyes.
Ski bag
Securing the ski bag
Capacity
The ski bag can be used to transport up to four
pairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m
or, depending on the binding, up to two snow‐
boards with a length of up to 5 ft/1.60 m.
Secure the ski bag by tightening the re‐
taining strap; otherwise, the contents could
present a source of danger to the passengers,
for example during braking or evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Preparing and loading the ski bag
1. Fold open the center armrest on the inside.
Removing the ski bag
2. Open the inside cover and cargo area by
pressing the button.
The ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., to
dry quickly or to use other inserts.
3. Lay out the ski bag.
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Interior equipment
Controls
1. Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag
out.
2. Close the cover in the cargo area.
More information on the various inserts availa‐
ble can be obtained from your service center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
159
Controls
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
▷ Net in the front passenger footwell.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Hints
No loose objects in the car's interior
Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐
rior without securing them; otherwise, they
may present a danger to occupants e.g., during
braking and evasive maneuvers.◀
Opening
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Pull the handle.
Storage compartments
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
Closing
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and
front passenger side, refer to page 160.
Fold cover closed.
▷ Storage compartment, refer to page 163,
in the center console for remote control.
Driver's side
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest, refer to page 161, in the front and
rear.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
160
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Storage compartments
Controls
Opening
Locking the storage compartment
Pull the handle.
The storage compartment in the armrest can
be locked with an integrated key to separately
secure the trunk lid, refer to page 42, e.g.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Center armrest
After the storage compartment is locked, the
remote control can be handed out without the
integrated key, refer to page 34, for instance at
a hotel.
Front
This prevents access to the storage compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Connection for an external audio
device
Opening
An external audio device, e.g.,
an MP3 player, can be con‐
nected via the AUX-IN port or
the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
Rear
The center armrest contains a storage com‐
partment.
Press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
161
Controls
Storage compartments
Folding down
Manual transmission: Front
On the center console
Pull on the opener and fold the armrest for‐
ward.
To open: press the button.
The insert folds out.
Opening
To use as a storage compartment, fold the in‐
sert back in.
M double-clutch transmission: Front
Pull on the handle and fold open the cover.
Cupholders
To open: press on the cover.
Hints
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Rear
In the front center armrest.
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀
The cupholder can be adjusted for three differ‐
ent container sizes.
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Storage compartments
To open: press the button.
To reduce in size: fold closed to the desired
position.
To close: fold all the way closed. The cu‐
pholder must be closed before it can be
opened fully.
Remote control storage
compartment
Opening
Controls
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's view.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀
Storage compartments in the
trunk
Net
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
side of the trunk.
To transport larger objects, it can be pushed
down.
Multi-function hook
Press on the cover.
Remote control storage compartment
A multi-function hook is available on the left
trunk wall.
Lightweight objects only
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐
ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
Storage is possible in a vertical position in the
center armrest.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located next to the grab
handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
rear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
163
Controls
Storage compartments
Storage under the cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Storage compartment on the side
A storage compartment is located at the side
of the trunk.
Lashing eyes
To secure the cargo, refer to page 175, there
are lashing eyes in the trunk.
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Storage compartments
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving tips
BMW M5 technology
BMW M5 technology
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
V8 high-performance engine
The high-performance V8 engine gets a maxi‐
mum power of 412 kW, with Competition
Package 423 kW, from a displacement of
4.4 liters and a maximum torque of 680 Nm.
With its spontaneous response behavior, a
speed range of wide utility results. The maxi‐
mum engine speed is 7,200 rpm and is elec‐
tronically controlled. Because of the high en‐
gine dynamics, the maximum engine speed
with the vehicle stationary is reduced.
Warm-up
During the engine warm-up phase, the
V8 high-performance engine has a somewhat
rougher running behavior because of the emis‐
sion controls.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the na‐
ture of the system.
For more information about the warm-up pro‐
cedure: Engine speed, refer to page 87, and
engine oil temperature, refer to page 87.
Compound brake
The high-performance braking system has
perforated compound brake discs.
168
Because of particular structural characteristics,
there may be operation-related noises during
braking. However, this has no effect on per‐
formance, operational reliability and reliability
of the brake.
Correct braking
To keep the brake system in optimum condi‐
tion, it is expedient to apply them at regular in‐
tervals corresponding to the vehicle character.
M carbon ceramic brake
The high-performance braking system has
perforated carbon-ceramic brake disks and is
designed for use on racetracks.
Due to properties of the materials used, brak‐
ing may be associated with louder function
noises, particularly in wet conditions, just be‐
fore the vehicle comes to a stop. However, this
has no effect on the performance, operational
reliability and durability of the brake.
The effects of moisture and road salt, from us‐
ing a carwash or dew formation overnight e.g.,
may render the braking effect comparable to
that of a conventional braking system. This
may be perceived as reduced braking effect
and can be compensated for if needed by
pressing the brake pedal harder.
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
carwash or wash tunnel, clean the brake discs
and brake calipers with a steam jet or highpressure washer as well, to prevent encrusta‐
tions and dirt buildups, caused by salt crystals,
e.g., if the car is immobile afterwards. The
cleaning effect of automatic carwashes or
wash tunnels is usually not adequate for this in
the area around the wheels.
To do this, also follow the instructions in
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 216, and
Braking safely, refer to page 172.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
BMW M5 technology
Driving tips
Drivetrain
With this vehicle, particular value was placed
on the direct connection from engine to the
drivetrain. Due to the torsionally rigid design of
the drivetrain, as is typical in a sports car, the
transmission of the torque also gives acoustic
feedback.
When there are load changes, this may result
in clicking noises. The do not cause any im‐
pairment of the operation or the service life of
the components.
Driving on racetracks
Requirements
Before driving on a racetrack:
▷ Participation in BMW Driver Experience
Training.
▷ Check engine oil fill level and replenish as
necessary.
▷ Have vehicle checked at a service center.
Hints
Racetrack operation leads to increased wear.
The vehicle is not designed for motorsports
competitive use. This wear is not covered by
the warranty.
The standard brake linings and the wear indi‐
cators are not designed for racetrack opera‐
tion. For more information and advice, contact
your service center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
169
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Use the maximum speed of 155 mph/250 km/h
only briefly, e.g., when passing.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
M Compound brakes require an initial break-in
period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve
optimal performance between brake discs and
brake pads. Drive moderately during this
break-in period.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 80.
M carbon ceramic brakes require an initial
break-in period of approx. 600 miles/1,000 km
to achieve optimal performance between brake
discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during
this break-in period.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Clutch
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
The following instructions will help accomplish
a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but
do not exceed 5,500 rpm and
106 mph/170 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
At 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Have drive-in checkup maintenance per‐
formed.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,100 miles/5,000 km
The engine and road speed can gradually be
increased to a constant speed of
137 mph/220 km/h.
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Things to remember when driving
General driving notes
Driving tips
Climate control windshield
Closing the trunk lid
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐
fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be
damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
ter the vehicle interior.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
The marked area is not covered with heat re‐
flective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot
exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact
could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased
risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐
erty damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,
there is a danger of getting burned.◀
Climate control laminated tinted
safety glass
The vehicle glass provides full protection
against the harmful effects of UV radiation on
the skin.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior
without a direct connection to an external aer‐
ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and
mobile communication devices can interfere
with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐
ance that the radiation generated during trans‐
mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐
cle interior.◀
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
171
Driving tips
Things to remember when driving
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
Observe water level and speed
Do not exceed the maximum water level
and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's
engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐
mission may be damaged.◀
Drive though calm water only and only if it is
not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations needed.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
The pulsing of the brake pedal indicates that
ABS is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can cause functional problems.
However, this has no effect on the perform‐
ance and operational reliability of the brake.
Objects within the range of movement
of the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly attached to
floor.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, e.g.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Avoid stressing the brakes
Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes
wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
Manual transmission:
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the
function of the pedals could be impeded while
driving and create the risk of an accident.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down in sequential mode, refer to
page 78.
172
M double-clutch transmission:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Things to remember when driving
Brake disc corrosion
Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the
brake pads are favored by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
Driving tips
ance. This includes, among other things, tires,
undercarriage and parts for improving aerody‐
namics.
Until the damage is repaired, do not drive the
vehicle in the higher speed range; otherwise,
there is the risk of an accident.◀
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during
braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
These traces of water under the vehicle are
normal.
Ground clearance
Limited ground clearance
Observe the limited ground clearance of
the vehicle, e. g. while entering underground
parking garages or when driving over obsta‐
cles. Otherwise, damages to the vehicle may
result.◀
To drive down from curbs with the Dynamic
Damping Control, refer to page 131, select the
following program, to keep the ground clear‐
ance as even as possible: "Sport Plus"
M Driver's Package: driving in the
higher speed range
Damage to the vehicle
To ensure problem-free driving behavior
in the maximum speed range, have any dam‐
age to the vehicle repaired as soon as possible
as it could negatively impact driving perform‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
173
Driving tips
Loading
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐
pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the cargo area
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀
Heavy and hard objects
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects
in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐
erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐
pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Loading
Load
Driving tips
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the trunk
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
To secure the cargo there are four lashing
eyes in the cargo area.
Securing cargo
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
Securing cargo
Stow and secure the cargo as described;
otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐
pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or
draw straps on the lashing eyes in the trunk.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Note
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
175
Driving tips
Loading
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof
drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Saving fuel
Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Drive away immediately
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
177
Driving tips
Saving fuel
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 91.
Use coasting
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stopand-go traffic.
Reel off these functions if they are not needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life.
The maintenance should be carried out by
your service center.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer
to page 201.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle
automatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Saving fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Driving tips
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Mobility
Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Hints
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 184, prior to refueling.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail
and damage might occur.◀
Fuel lid
Closing
Opening
1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g.
The release is located in the trunk.
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Refueling
Mobility
Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.
This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Observe safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
183
Mobility
Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Fuel recommendation
Note
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐
age of ethanol
Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐
centage than recommended or one with other
types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise
this could damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀
Recommended fuel grade
General fuel quality
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
gine problems, for instance poor engine startup behavior, poor handling and/or poor
performance. Switch gas stations or use a
brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
out metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, as this can cause permanent damage to
the catalytic converter and other compo‐
nents.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
184
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Fuel quality
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Fuel
Mobility
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
185
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may underread by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
▷ Driving comfort.
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 187, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure
specifications apply to approved tire sizes and
recommended tire brands. This information
can be obtained from your service center.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 187, and adjust as necessary.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
M5
Tire size
Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
255/40 R 19 100
V M+S XL
2.5 / 36
2.5 / 36
255/35 R 20 97
V M+S XL
2.7 / 39
2.7 / 39
Front: 265/40 ZR
19 102 (Y) XL
2.2 / 31
-
-
2.2 / 31
2.4 / 34
-
-
2.4 / 34
Rear: 295/35 ZR
19 104 (Y) XL
Front: 265/35 ZR
20 99 (Y) XL
Rear: 295/30 ZR
20 101 (Y) XL
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
M5
Tire size
Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
255/40 R 19 100
V M+S XL
3.0 / 43
3.0 / 43
255/35 R 20 97
V M+S XL
3.0 / 43
3.3 / 47
Front: 265/40 ZR
19 102 (Y) XL
2.6 / 37
-
-
2.6 / 37
2.8 / 40
-
-
2.8 / 40
Rear: 295/35 ZR
19 104 (Y) XL
Front: 265/35 ZR
20 99 (Y) XL
Rear: 295/30 ZR
20 101 (Y) XL
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
187
Mobility
Wheels and tires
45: aspect ratio in %
DOT Quality Grades
R: radial tire code
Treadwear
18: rim diameter in inches
Traction AA A B C
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Temperature A B C
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
xxx: tire size and tire design
Traction
0115: tire age
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2015.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Temperature
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
Recommendation
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Wheels and tires
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
Mobility
Minimum tread depth
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Hints
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
189
Mobility
Wheels and tires
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
rims and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If
necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐
ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐
come life threatening for vehicle occupants
and also other traffic.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Approved wheels and tires
You should only use wheels and tires
that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐
facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g.,
despite having the same official size ratings,
variations can lead to chassis contact and with
it, the risk of severe accidents
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
cannot guarantee the operating safety of the
vehicle.◀
Recommended tire brands
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
Wheel and tire combination
New tires
You can ask the service center about the right
wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions
for the vehicle.
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
190
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Mobility System
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the
tire specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐
age and accidents can occur.◀
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against switching wheels between the front
and rear axles. This can impair the handling
characteristics.
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
front and rear axles.
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed quickly to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
Hints
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact the nearest service center if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
nity and have them replaced if needed.
Enclosed areas
Storage
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Storage
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
191
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Filling the tire with sealant
Sealing container
1. Shake the sealing container.
▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the
compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
Compressor
3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐
nector of the sealant container.
1
Holder for bottle
2
Compressor
3
Connector/cable for socket
4
Connection hose
5
On/off reel
6
Inflation pressure dial
7
Reduce inflation pressure
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Wheels and tires
4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐
pressor housing in an upright position.
5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the defective
wheel.
Mobility
7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
running, reel on the compressor.
Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐
nutes
Do not allow the compressor to run longer than
10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat
and may be damaged.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐
nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at
this point.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your service center.
Stowing the Mobility System
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire
valve with the available connector on the
sealant container.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
193
Mobility
Wheels and tires
This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐
ing from the container.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of the
vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.
Information about the approved snow chains
are available from the service center.
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Use
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
▷ 255/40 R 19
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
▷ 255/35 R 20
To correct the tire inflation pressure
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, reel
on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, if needed
briefly activate M Dynamic Mode.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐
ble.
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Engine compartment
Mobility
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1
Vehicle identification number
5
Coolant reservoir for charge air cooling
2
Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
6
Oil filler neck.
3
Washer fluid reservoir
7
Coolant reservoir for engine cooling
4
Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
Hood
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
195
Mobility
Engine compartment
Never reach into the engine compart‐
ment
Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine
compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐
jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protrud‐
ing parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
mediately and close it securely.◀
Danger of jamming
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Engine oil
Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
case of, for example:
▷ Sporty driving.
Electronic oil measurement
Status display
The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
▷ Break-in the engine.
Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Idling of the engine.
On the Control Display:
▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades.
1. "Vehicle info"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
2. "Vehicle status"
When a dynamic driving style is used, such as
when cornering fast, the system is unable to
measure the engine oil level. With this driving
style, measure the engine oil level using a de‐
tailed measurement, refer to page 198.
Depending on its engine, the vehicle is equip‐
ped with electronic oil measurement or oil
measuring is done with a dipstick.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display
▷ Detailed measurement
3.
"Engine oil level"
Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to
page 198.
Engine oil level too low
Add engine oil immediately; otherwise,
an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐
sult in engine damage.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
197
Mobility
Engine oil
Adding engine oil
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.◀
Detailed measurement
General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Oil filler neck
The concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked and displayed via a scale.
Gasoline engine:
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Diesel engine:
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is on level road.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ M Double clutch transmission: selector
lever in selector lever position N and accel‐
erator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1. "Vehicle info"
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Adding engine oil
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀
Do not add too much engine oil
When too much engine oil is added, im‐
mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
this may cause engine damage.◀
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐
ers to prevent health risks.◀
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
198
Engine oil types to add
Hints
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Engine oil
Mobility
Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to the viscosity grade
SAE 0W-40, or malfunctions or engine dam‐
age may occur.
As an alternative, you can also use motor oils
with a viscosity grade of SAE 0W-30.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Oil rating
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Further information regarding the oil specifica‐
tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐
quired with the service center.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Oil rating
API SM or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change:
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let the service center change the motor oil.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
199
Mobility
Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Hints
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about the
suitable additives are available from the service
center.
Coolant level
General information
Have your service center check the coolant
level and add coolant if needed.
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Maintenance
Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Additional information is available from
the service center.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 90, can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if needed,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed
by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
201
Mobility
Maintenance
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Note
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
The socket for onboard diagnostics may
only be used by the service center or a work‐
shop that operates in accordance with the
specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with
correspondingly trained personnel and other
authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result
in operating problems for the vehicle.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Replacing components
Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 76, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in a
fold-down cover in the trunk lid.
Unscrew the wing nut to open.
Wiper blade replacement
Hints
Do not fold down the wipers without
wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Hints
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
203
Mobility
Replacing components
the service center if you are unfamiliar those or
if they have not been described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is a danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system,
you should always reel off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlights
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is a danger of fatal
injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If the headlights do not dim despite driving
with the light switched on, increasing humidity
forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
service center check this.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐
lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐
ice after a replacement.
Front lights, bulb replacement
Xenon headlights
At a glance
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
204
1
Corner-illuminating lights
2
Parking lamp, daytime running lights
3
Low beams/high beams
4
Turn signal
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Replacing components
Mobility
Hints
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lights on and off frequently shortens their life.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlights
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is a danger of fatal
injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
Unscrew the lid, remove it, and change the
bulb.
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Corner-illuminating lights
Parking lights and roadside parking lamp
The illustration shows the left side of the en‐
gine compartment.
Follow general instructions, refer to page 203.
These lights feature LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Follow general instructions, refer to page 203.
55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Fold open the cover in the engine compart‐
ment.
Accessing the bulbs
2. Unscrew the lid and remove it.
Remove the screws and fold down the lid.
Turn signal
Follow general instructions, refer to page 203.
The illustration shows the left side of the en‐
gine compartment.
24-watt bulb, PY.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
205
Mobility
Replacing components
3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
At a glance
4. Remove the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
LED headlights
At a glance
1
Turn signal
2
Reversing lamp
3
Inside brake lamp
4
Rear lamp
5
Outside brake lamp
6
Rear reflector
Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and
license plate lights
Follow general instructions, refer to page 203.
These lights feature LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
1
Corner-illuminating lights
2
Low beams/high beams
3
Parking lamp, daytime running lights
4
Turn signal
Access to the lights
5
Side marker lights
1. Remove the three screws using the screw
driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Lights in the trunk lid
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
With LED headlights, all front lights and side
indicators are designed with LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Replacing components
Mobility
2. Fold away the cover.
The illustration shows the position of the bulb
in the installed bulb holder.
Inside brake lamp
Follow general instructions, refer to page 203.
21-watt bulb, H21W.
Squeeze the clips together and remove the
bulb holder.
Pull out the bulb and replace it.
The illustration shows the position of the bulb
in the installed bulb holder.
Changing wheels
Hints
When sealants are used, an immediate wheel
change when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure in the event of a flat tire is unneces‐
sary.
Which is why no spare tire is available.
Squeeze the clips together and remove the
bulb holder.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn coun‐
terclockwise and remove.
Reversing lamp
Follow general instructions, refer to page 203.
16-watt bulb, W16W.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
207
Mobility
Replacing components
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
Hints
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Do not connect charging devices to the
12 volt socket in the vehicle
Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐
tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as
this may damage the vehicle battery due to an
increased power consumption.◀
Starting aid terminals
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
Further information about the battery can be
obtained from your service center.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by the service center
to ensure that all comfort features are fully
available and that any Check Control mes‐
sages of these comfort features are no longer
displayed.
Charging the battery
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 212, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
tings updated, e. g.:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to
page 51.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Replacing components
Mobility
Fuses
Hints
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the trunk.
In the glove compartment
Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,
arrow 2.
In the trunk
Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
209
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Hints
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
able conditions.◀
Overview
Hazard warning flashers
SOS button in the roofliner
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
The button is located in the center console.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Intelligent Emergency
Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
The concept
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through this system.
▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Initiating an Emergency Request
If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
the Emergency Request can be aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Breakdown assistance
When the emergency request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
Mobility
First aid kit
Note
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Warning triangle
The first aid kit is located in the container on
the inside of the trunk lid.
Unscrew the wing nut to open.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Hints
Do not touch live parts
The warning triangle is located in the container
on the inside of the trunk lid.
Unscrew the wing nut to open.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
211
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Connecting the cables
Preparation
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀
1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Breakdown assistance
Tow-starting and towing
Mobility
Tow truck
Note
Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀
Manual transmission
Observe before towing your vehicle
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Towing
When the parking brake is blocked
The parking brake cannot be released
manually.
Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brake
blocked, or the vehicle can be damaged.
Contact your service center.◀
Follow the towing instructions
Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,
vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
M double-clutch transmission:
transporting your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
cur.◀
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐
cle's response.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
213
Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Tow truck
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
Do not lift the vehicle
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
sitioning the vehicle.
Tow fitting
Towing other vehicles
Hints
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the BMW.
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
The tow fitting is located in the container on
the inside of the trunk lid.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
Tow bar
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
214
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Breakdown assistance
Mobility
Screw thread for tow fitting
Push out the cover by pressing on the top
edge.
Tow-starting
M double-clutch transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 211. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Ignition, refer to page 68, on.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
215
Mobility
Care
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with
high-pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors and camera lenses on the
outside of the vehicle for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀
Automatic car washes
Hints
Note the following:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
Car washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Hints
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 75, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
refer to page 48.
Guide rails in car washes
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐
sively high pressures or temperatures can
cause damage or preliminary damage that may
then lead to long-term damage.
Before driving into a car wash
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure
washer.◀
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Manual transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Shift to neutral.
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Care
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Switch on the ignition.
M double-clutch transmission:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
Do not turn off the ignition in the car
wash
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;
otherwise, the transmission position P is
engaged and damages can result.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in selector lever position N. A signal
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
To start the engine with manual transmission:
1. Press on the clutch pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
To start the engine with a M double clutch
transmission:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlights
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
Mobility
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using care and cleaning
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
217
Mobility
Care
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Caring for special components
Only use respectively approved cleaning and
care products for vehicles with matte finish.
Suitable care products for matte finishes are
available from the service center.
Light-alloy wheels
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the seat
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Care
No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
to surface damage.◀
Mobility
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/monitors
Cleaning displays and screens
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the
function of the pedals could be impeded while
driving and create the risk of an accident.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Do not use any chemical or household
cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐
fected.◀
Keeping out moisture
Keep all fluids and moisture away from
the unit; otherwise, electrical components can
be damaged.◀
Avoid pressure
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning
and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise,
damage can result.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Additional information is available from
the service center.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly attached to
floor.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, e.g.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Reference
Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, countryspecific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Note
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on informa‐
tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained
from the service center.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
BMW M5 Sedan
Width with mirrors
inches/mm
83.4 /2,119
Width without mirrors
inches/mm
74.4/1,891
Height
inches/mm
57.3/1,456
Length
inches/mm
193.5/4,916
Wheelbase
inches/mm
116.7/2,964
Smallest turning radius diam.
ft/m
40.7/12.4
Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐
cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐
222
lowing the slash apply to vehicles with M dou‐
ble-clutch transmission.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Technical data
Reference
M5
Approved gross vehicle weight
lbs/kg
5,313/2,410
Load
lbs
959/926
kg
435/420
Approved front axle load
lbs/kg
2,601/1,180
Approved rear axle load
lbs/kg
2,778/1,260
Approved roof load capacity
lbs/kg
220/100
Trunk capacity
cu ft/l
18.4/520
Capacities
Fuel tank, approx.
US gal/liters
Notes
21.1 / 80
Fuel quality, refer to
page 184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
223
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 127
Acceleration Assistant, refer
to Launch Control 80
Accessories and parts 7
Activated-charcoal filter 147
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 122
Active M differential 131
Active Protection 124
Active seat, front 55
Active seat ventilation,
front 56
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 124
Adaptive Light Control 101
Additives, oil 198
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 53
After washing vehicle 217
Airbags 105
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 106
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 146
Air, dehumidifying, refer to
Cooling function 146
Air distribution, manual 145
Air flow, automatic climate
control 145
Air outlets, see ventila‐
tion 147
Air pressure, tires 186
Alarm system 47
Alarm, unintentional 48
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the roofliner 17
224
All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 191
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 152
Alternative oil types 199
Ambient light 104
Animal detection, see Night
Vision 118
Antifreeze, washer fluid 76
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 127
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 129
Approved axle load 222
Approved engine oils, see
Suitable engine oil
types 199
Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
rest 161
Arrival time 94
Ashtray 153
Ashtray, front 153, 154
Ashtray, rear 154
Assistance when driving
off 127
Attentiveness assistant 124
AUTO intensity 145
Automatic car wash 216
Automatic climate con‐
trol 144
Automatic Curb Monitor 61
Automatic deactivation, frontseat passenger airbags 107
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 101
Automatic locking 46
Automatic recirculated-air
control 146
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 40
Automatic trunk lid 41
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 145
AUTO program, intensity 145
Auto Start/Stop function 70
Average fuel consumption 94
Average speed 94
Axle loads, weights 222
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 54
Backrest, width 54
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 211
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 214
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 208
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 35
Battery, vehicle 208
Belts, safety belts 56
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 162
Blinds, sun protection 49
BMW Assist, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Driver’s Guide App 6
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 201
BMW M technology 168
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Brake assistant 127
Brake discs, break-in 170
Brake force display 124
Brake lights, adaptive 124
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 124
Brake lights, bulb replace‐
ment 206
Brake pads, break-in 170
Braking, hints 172
Breakdown assistance 210
Break-in 170
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 97
Bulb replacement 203
Bulb replacement, front 204
Bulb replacement, rear 206
Bulbs and lights 203
Button, Start/Stop 68
Bypassing, refer to Jumpstarting 211
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 46
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 46
Calling up steering wheel ad‐
justment 46
Camera lenses, care 219
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 138
Camera, Side View 140
Camera, Top View 142
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 162
Car battery 208
Carbon ceramic brake M 168
Car care products 217
Care, displays 219
Care, vehicle 217
Cargo 174
Cargo area, enlarging 156
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 163
Cargo, securing 175
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 175
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 34
Carpet, care 219
Car wash 216
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 171
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 201
CD/Multimedia, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Center armrest 161
Center console 16
Central locking system 40
Central screen, refer to Con‐
trol Display 18
Ceramic brake 168
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 203
Changing wheels 207
Changing wheels/tires 190
Chassis number, see vehicle
identification number 9
Check Control 84
Checking the engine oil level
electronically 197
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 197
Children, seating position 64
Children, transporting
safely 64
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 64
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 65
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 64
Child safety locks 67
Child seat, mounting 64
Reference
Child seats 64
Chrome parts, care 218
Cigarette lighter 153
Cleaning displays 219
Climate control 144
Climate control laminated
tinted safety glass 171
Climate control wind‐
shield 171
Clock 88
Closing/opening via door
lock 39
Closing/opening with remote
control 37
Closing the trunk lid with notouch activation 44
Clothes hooks 163
Combination reel, refer to
Turn signals 74
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 74
Comfort Access 43
Compound brake 168
Compressor 191
Computer, refer to On-board
computer 93
Condensation on win‐
dows 145
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 173
Condition Based Service
CBS 201
Confirmation signal 46
ConnectedDrive, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 96
Controller 18
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 127
Convenient opening with the
remote control 37
Coolant 200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
225
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Coolant level 200
Coolant temperature 88
Cooling function 146
Cooling, maximum 146
Cooling system 200
Cornering light 101
Corrosion on brake discs 173
Cosmetic mirror 153
Courtesy lamps during un‐
locking 37
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cle locked 38
Cruise control 133
Cruising range 89
Cupholder 162
Current fuel consumption 89
D
Damage, tires 189
Damping control 131
Damping control, dy‐
namic 131
Data, technical 222
Date 88
Daytime running lights 101
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 145
Dehumidifying, air 146
Deleting personal data 24
Deletion of personal data 24
Destination distance 94
Differential lock 131
Digital clock 88
Digital speed 88
Digital tachometer 88
Dimensions 222
Dimmable exterior mirrors 61
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 62
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 74
Display EfficientDynamics 90
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 83
Display in windshield 97
226
Display lighting, refer to In‐
strument lighting 103
Displays, cleaning 219
Disposal, coolant 200
Disposal, vehicle battery 208
Distance control, refer to
PDC 135
Distance to destination 94
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door lock 39
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 34
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 40
Double-clutch transmis‐
sion 77
Drivelogic 79
Drive mode 78
Drive-off assistant 127
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 129
Driver assistance, refer to In‐
telligent Safety 112
Driving Assistant, refer to In‐
telligent Safety 112
Driving Dynamics Control 81
Driving instructions, breakin 170
Driving notes, general 171
Driving on racetracks 169
Driving program, refer to
Drivelogic 79
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 127
Driving tips 171
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 129
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 131
Dynamic driving systems 90
Dynamic driving, system
states 90
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 129
E
EfficientDynamics 90
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 83
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 197
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 129
Emergency detection, remote
control 35
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 182
Emergency Request 210
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 35
Emergency unlocking, trunk
lid 43
Energy Control 89
Energy recovery 89
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 70
Engine, automatic switchoff 70
Engine compartment 195
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 195
Engine coolant 200
Engine oil 197
Engine oil, adding 198
Engine oil additives 198
Engine oil change 199
Engine oil filler neck 198
Engine oil temperature 87
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 199
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 199
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 35
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 211
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 69
Engine stop 69
Engine temperature 87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Entering a car wash 216
Equipment, interior 151
Error displays, see Check
Control 84
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 129
Exchanging wheels/tires 190
Exhaust system 171
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 61
Exterior mirrors 60
External start 211
External temperature dis‐
play 88
External temperature warn‐
ing 88
Eyes for securing cargo 175
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 84
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 48
Fan, refer to Air flow 145
Filler neck for engine oil 198
Fine wood, care 218
First aid kit 211
Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐
ting 214
Flat tire, changing
wheels 207
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 111
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 108
Flat tire, warning
lamp 109, 111
Flooding 172
Floor carpet, care 219
Floor mats, care 219
Fold down the rear seat back‐
rest, see Though-loading
system 156
Fold-out position, wiper 76
Foot brake 172
Front airbags 105
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func‐
tion 113
Front lights 204
front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 107
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 107
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 111
Fuel 184
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 94
Fuel filler flap 182
Fuel gauge 87
Fuel lid 182
Fuel quality 184
Fuel recommendation 184
Fuel, tank capacity 223
Fuse 209
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Universal Integrated Remote
Control 151
Gasoline 184
Gear change 79
Gear shift indicator 91
General driving notes 171
Glare shield 153
Glass sunroof, powered 50
Glove compartment 160
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 222
Ground clearance 173
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 72
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 152
Hazard warning flashers 210
Head airbags 105
Reference
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 101
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 100
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 38
Headlight flasher 74
Headlight glass 204
Headlights 204
Headlights, care 217
Headlight washer system 74
Head restraints 53
Head restraints, front 57
Head restraints, rear 58
Head-up Display 97
Head-up Display, care 219
Head-up display, M view 98
Head-up display, standard
view 98
Heavy cargo, stowing 175
Height, vehicle 222
High-beam Assistant 102
High beams 74
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 102
Higher speed range 173
Hills 172
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 127
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 162
Homepage 6
Hood 195
Horn 14
Hotel function, trunk lid 42
Hot exhaust system 171
HUD Head-up Display 97
Hydroplaning 171
I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 88
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 88
Identification marks, tires 187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
227
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Identification number, see ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 9
iDrive 18
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 34
Ignition off 68
Ignition on 68
Indication of a flat
tire 109, 111
Indicator and alarm lamps,
see Check Control 84
Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 84
Individual air distribution 145
Individual settings, refer to M
Drive 127
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 35
Inflation pressure, tires 186
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 111
Info display, refer to OnBoard computer 93
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 109
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 111
Instrument cluster 83
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 83
Instrument lighting 103
Integrated key 34
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 29
Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 210
Intelligent Safety 112
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 145
Interior equipment 151
Interior lights 103
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 37
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 38
228
Interior motion sensor 48
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 62
Interior rearview mirror, man‐
ually dimmable 62
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 90
Interval mode 75
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 208
Jump-starting 211
K
Key/remote control 34
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 43
Key Memory, refer to Per‐
sonal Profile 35
Knee airbag 106
L
Lamp replacement 203
Lamp replacement, front 204
Lamp replacement, rear 206
Lane departure warning 121
Lane margin, warning 121
Language on Control Dis‐
play 96
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 175
LATCH child restraint sys‐
tem 65
Launch Control 80
Leather, care 218
LED headlights, bulb replace‐
ment 206
LED light 206
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 204
Length, vehicle 222
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 24
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 206
Light alloy wheels, care 218
Light control 101
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 204
Lighter, front 153, 154
Lighter, rear 155
Lighting 100
Lighting, speaker 104
Lights 100
Lights and bulbs 203
Light switch 100
Load 175
Loading 174
Lock, door 39
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 39
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 37
Locking, automatic 46
Locking, settings 46
Locking via trunk lid 41
Lock, power window 49
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 67
Low beams 100
Low beams, automatic, refer
to High-beam Assistant 102
Lower back support 54
Low Speed Assistant 78
Luggage rack, see Roofmounted luggage rack 175
Lumbar support 54
M
Maintenance 201
Maintenance require‐
ments 201
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 90
Maintenance system,
BMW 201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Make-up mirror 153
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 84
Manual air distribution 145
Manual air flow 145
Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 72
Manual operation, door
lock 39
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 61
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 182
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 136
Manual operation, rearview
camera 138
Manual operation, Side
View 141
Manual operation, Top
View 142
Manual transmission 82
Marking on approved
tires 190
Massage seat, front 55
Master key, refer to Remote
control 34
Maximum cooling 146
Maximum speed, display 92
Maximum speed, winter
tires 191
M carbon ceramic brake 168
M Compound brake 168
M differential, active 131
MDM, M Dynamic Mode 129
M double-clutch transmis‐
sion 77
M Drive 127
M Driver's Package, driving
instructions 173
M Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 81
M Dynamic Mode MDM 129
Measure, units of 97
Medical kit 211
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 59
Menu EfficientDynamics 90
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 93
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 19
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 84
Microfilter 147
Minimum tread, tires 189
Mirror 60
Mirror memory 59
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 171
Mobility System 191
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 204
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint
systems 64
M technology 168
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
M view, Head-up display 98
N
Navigation, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 57
Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 58
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 218
New wheels and tires 190
Night Vision 118
Night Vision device, see Night
Vision 118
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 214
Reference
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 202
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 202
Object detection, see Night
Vision 118
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 139
Octane rating, refer to Rec‐
ommended fuel grade 184
Odometer 88
Office, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Oil 197
Oil, adding 198
Oil additives 198
Oil change 199
Oil change interval, service
requirements 90
Oil filler neck 198
Oil types, alternative 199
Oil types, approved 199
Old batteries, disposal 208
On-board computer 93
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 203
Opening/closing via door
lock 39
Opening and closing 34
Opening and closing, without
remote control 39
Opening and closing, with re‐
mote control 37
Opening the trunk lid with notouch activation 44
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Auto‐
matic recirculated-air con‐
trol 146
Overheating of engine, refer
to Coolant temperature 88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
229
Reference
Everything from A to Z
P
Paint, vehicle 217
Park Distance Control
PDC 135
Parked-car ventilation 150
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 173
Parking aid, refer to PDC 135
Parking brake 72
Parking lights 100
Parts and accessories 7
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 61
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 139
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 135
Pedestrian detection, see
Night Vision 118
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function 115
Personal Profile 35
Personal Profile, exporting
profiles 36
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 51
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 49
Plastic, care 218
Power failure 208
Power sunroof, glass 50
Power windows 48
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 186
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 111
Preventing Auto Start
Stop 71
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 35
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 23
Protective function, glass
sunroof 51
230
Protective function, win‐
dows 49
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 18
R
Radiator fluid 200
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 34
Radio ready state 68
Radio, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Rain sensor 75
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 148
Rear lights 206
Rear socket 156
Rearview camera 137
Rearview mirror 60
Rear window defroster 146
Recirculated-air mode 146
Recommended fuel
grade 184
Recommended tire
brands 190
Refueling 182
Remaining range 89
Remote control/key 34
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 38
Remote control, univer‐
sal 151
Replacement fuse 209
Replacing parts 203
Replacing wheels/tires 190
Reporting safety defects 9
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 133
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 89
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 109
Residual heat, automatic cli‐
mate control 147
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 175
Retreaded tires 190
Reversing lamp, bulb replace‐
ment 206
Roadside parking lights 101
Roller sunblinds 49
RON recommended fuel
grade 184
Roofliner 17
Roof load capacity 222
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 175
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 214
Rubber components,
care 218
S
Safe braking 172
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 57
Safety belts 56
Safety belts, care 219
Safety Package, refer to Ac‐
tive Protection 124
Safety switch, windows 49
Safety systems, airbags 105
Saving fuel 177
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 203
Screw thread, refer to Screw
thread for tow fitting, screw
thread for tow fitting 215
Sealant 191
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 56
Seat heating, front 55
Seat heating, rear 55
Seating position for chil‐
dren 64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 59
Seats 53
Seat ventilation, front 56
Selection list in instrument
cluster 93
Selector lever 77
Selector lever position 77
Sensors, care 219
Sequential mode 78
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 201
Service requirements, dis‐
play 90
Services, ConnectedDrive
Servotronic 131
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 133
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 46
Settings, M Drive 127
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 96
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 59
Shift point indicator 99
Shoulder support 55
Side airbags 105
Side View 140
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 46
Sitting safely 53
Size 222
Ski bag 158
Slide/tilt glass roof 50
Smallest turning radius 222
Smoker's package 153
Snow chains 194
Socket 155
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 202
SOS button 210
Spare fuse 209
Speaker lighting 104
Specified engine oil
types 199
Speed, average 94
Speed limit detection, onboard computer 95
Speed limiter, display 92
Speed Limit Information 92
Speed warning 95
Split screen 23
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 95
Stability control systems 127
Standard view, head-up dis‐
play 98
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 70
Start/Stop button 68
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 35
Starting the engine 69
Status control display,
tires 109
Status information, iDrive 22
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering assistance 131
Steering wheel, adjusting 62
Steering wheel heating 63
Steering wheel memory 59
Stopping the engine 69
Storage compartment, re‐
mote control 163
Storage compartments 160
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 160
Storage, tires 191
Storing the vehicle 219
Suitable engine oils 199
Summer tires, tread 189
Sun visor 153
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 87
Surround View 137
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 150
Switch, refer to Cockpit 14
Reference
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 22
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 146
System states of dynamic
driving 90
T
Tachometer 87
Tail and brake lights 206
Tail lights 206
Tail lights, bulb replace‐
ment 206
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 222
Technology, BMW M 168
Telephone, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 145
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 88
Temperature, engine oil 87
Terminal, starting aid 212
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 87
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 47
Thermal camera, see Night
Vision 118
Through-loading system 156
Tilt alarm sensor 47
Time of arrival 94
Tire damage 189
Tire identification marks 187
Tire inflation pressure 186
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, refer to FTM 111
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 108
Tires, changing 190
Tire sealant 191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
231
Reference
Everything from A to Z
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 186
Tire tread 189
Tone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tool 203
Top View 141
Total vehicle weight 222
Touchpad 21
Tow fitting 214
Towing 213
Tow lug, see Tow fitting 214
Tow-starting 213
Tow truck 213
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 108
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 82
Transporting children
safely 64
Tread, tires 189
Trip computer 95
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 74
Trip odometer 88
Truck for tow-starting/
towing 213
Trunk lid, automatic 41
Trunk lid closing 41
Trunk lid, closing with notouch activation 44
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 43
Trunk lid, hotel function 42
Trunk lid opening 40
Trunk lid, opening with notouch activation 44
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 38
Turning circle 222
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 139
Turn signals, operation 74
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 206
232
U
W
Unintentional alarm 48
Units of measure 97
Universal remote control 151
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 39
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 37
Unlocking, settings 46
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 218
USB interface 156
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 84
Warning displays, see Check
Control 84
Warning messages, see
Check Control 84
Warning triangle 211
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 76
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 76
Washer system 74
Washing, vehicle 216
Water on roads 172
Weights 222
Welcome lamps during un‐
locking 37
Welcome lights 100
Wheel base, vehicle 222
Wheel cleaner 218
Wheels, changing 190
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 186
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 111
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 108
Width, vehicle 222
Window defroster, rear 146
Windows, powered 48
Windshield, climate con‐
trol 171
Windshield washer fluid 76
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 76
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 74
Windshield wiper 74
Winter storage, care 219
Winter tires, suitable
tires 191
Winter tires, tread 189
Wiper 74
Wiper blades, replacing 203
V
V8 high-performance engine,
High-performance engine
V8 168
Vanity mirror 153
Vehicle battery 208
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 208
Vehicle, break-in 170
Vehicle care 217
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 6
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 9
Vehicle jack 208
Vehicle paint 217
Vehicle storage 219
Vehicle wash 216
Ventilation 147
Ventilation, refer to Parkedcar ventilation 150
Venting, see ventilation 147
Vent, see ventilation 147
VIN, see vehicle identification
number 9
Voice activation system 26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Wiper fluid 76
Wiper, fold-out position 76
Wiper system 74
Wood, care 218
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 203
X
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15
233
BMW M
01 40 2 954 339 ue
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
*BL295433900J*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 339 - II/15